Home

SERVICE MANUAL

1. Main power switch turned ON start key turned ON Control panel power OFF copier mode A4 cassette 1 3 copies z 2 ie INTR1 STBY INTR2 scrw scRv scrw serv LSTR STBY SLEEP 2 Main motor 1 t AGC Fixing heater H4 I r ET 2 Scanner motor M2 m 1 Scanner home position sensor PS1 Fr Scanning lamp FL1 Shading mesurement I i Cassette Pick up solenoid E W 2 Pick up motor M4 uawan Vertical path roller clutch oo Vertical path roll paper sensor 2 Pre registration paper sensor 2 Registration clutch 1 Primary charging roller bias DC component H Primary charging roll bias AC component Transfer charging roller Separation static eliminator Transfer guide bias Fixing assembly bias ww 1 Laser scanner motor V 2 Laser exposure 2 Developing bias DC component a pe TT 1 Developing bias ADc component 2
2. Binary processing Shading Reproduction Edge PD a Reversal Density OL l gt gt e e gt gt 9 correction ratio emphasis Synthesis cortection laser D A conversion Image Processor PCB SCSI board Telephone Y line Density Binary NCU z correction processing ED FAX Board memory lt gt Resolution Rotation 200101 Modem conversion g reproduction ratio soe Expansion Protocol Controller Board memory Rotation 7 Command CIST memory conversion Memory k SCSI controller CORE IP Board Video DP DP controller RAM LAN controller Host VF computer controller 1 Printer Board NIB Host computer E L IL LAN COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 155 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Figure 4 211 Figure 4 212 6 Disconnect the four connectors 4 6 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON eee 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM D Fans 1 Removing the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Remove the four screws and remove the rear cover Remove the screw and remove the left cover Be sure to disengage the four hooks of the left cover Disconnect the two connectors 1 remove the two screws 2 and disengage the three hooks 3 to remove the fixing heat exhaust fan COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Figure 4 213 2 1 2 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Scanner Cooling Fan Remove the four screws and remove the rear cover Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the tie wrap then disengage the two hooks 2 left right and remove the scanner cooling fan 3 Figure 4 214 4 7 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM DRIVE ASSEMBLY 2 Removing the Scanner Cable 1 Remove the following Copyboard gla
4. b In the case of reading mode multi value Binary processing Shading Reproduction Edge PD a a Reversal Density B gt correction ratio emphasis p Synthesis ection laser D A conversion Image processor PCB SCSI Board 1 Telephone Density Y line correction Binary NCU _ Ke processing ED FAX Board memory gt gt controller Resolution Rotation Coding 3 Modem conversion decoding reproduction ratio Expansion Protocol Controller Board memory ion T Command CIST dl Conversion Memory SCSI controller CORE IP Board lt Video DP DP controller RAM LAN Host VF controller computer controller 1 Printer Board NIB Host computer L I 1 1 LAN T TI L I 3 156 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON eee 3 OPERATIONS AND 3 Flow of Image Signals for the Network Interface Board
5. 512 23 8 5 4 5 5 5 o 5 lt lt Cassette pick up Cassette pick up PCB Photosensitive drum 5 T m ex S Registration roller Y gt Man motor Pick up unit C 1 pre registration roller Cassette pck up roller drive motor NE i Vertical Vertical path path roller roller 2 clutch 5222 Feeding roller Pick up C JP solenoid I Cam Figure 3 603 Conceptual Diagram of the Pick Up Unit Drive Mechanism 3 80 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Notation Name Jack Q1604 Upper cassette paper sensor J105 10 Q1605 Lower cassette paper sensor J105 11 Q1606 Upper cassette paper level sensor 0 J108 1 Q1607 Upper cassette paper level sensor 1 J108 2 Q1608 Lower cassette paper level sensor 0 J108 3 Q1609 Lower cassette paper level sensor 1 J108 4 Jack in the signal line on the DC controller PCB Table 3 604 Sensors on the Cassette Pick Up PCB pick up unit COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 81 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
6. Binary processing i 5 Density PD a Shading Reproduction Edge Synthesis amp M correction ratio emphasis 9 e Sal correction laser D A Image processor PCB conversion SCSI Board Telephone 23 line Density Binary NCU correction processing ED FAX Board C di odin Resolution Rotation je 5 Modem conversion memory reproduction controller ratio Memory Expansion Protocol Controller Board memory Rotation CIST memory Command conversion Memory i Smoothing i CORE IP Board SCSI controller Video controller LAN controller Host controller 1 Printer Board NIB Host computer LAN COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 157 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING X SERVICE MODE A Outline The machine s service mode is grouped into the following Description 1 DIAPLAY Display Mode Indicates the values controlled by the CPU nature of con trol and version number of the ROM 2 VO DIAPLAY I O Display Mode Indicates the elements controlled by the CPU or the input output signals to and from options 3 ADJUST Adjustment Mode Ind
7. 2 Operation of Original Size Sensors a A3 black original A reflecting type sensor is used under the b Book original The thickness of a book pre copyboard glass to detect the size of an original vents changes in the sensor level placed on the copyboard glass c The copyboard cover is not closed PS3 is When the copyboard cover is brought down to OFF about 30 the photointerrupter PS3 located at the rear of the copier turns ON i e the light Reference blocking plate blocks PS3 In the case of a b or c the size may be The output level of each sensor is read for 15 detected wrongly sec or until the Copy Start key is pressed after PS3 has turned ON at intervals of 0 128 sec The presence of an original at the sensor position is assumed if the output level remains unchanged during the period and the size of the original is identified as shown in Tables 3 205 through 208 This way of identifying the size enables identi fication of the size of black originals as well In the case of a b described below however the output level will remain unchanged In the case of c described below on the other hand A3 will be selected with priority if no cas sette contains A3 paper the cassette selected under standard mode will be selected Copyboard cover Original y 30 PS3 ON Copyboard glass l OFFA gt ON ON Original No Change detection
8. SW5 6 1 JA1 E Figure 5 502 JA2 3 Arrange the jumper connectors JA1 A2 JB1 JB2 on the Copy Data Controller A1 to suit Figure 5 505 the needs of the user LED1 LED2 LED3 eee w 7 LED4 LED5 LED6 5 JA1 JC8 g 165 m B 2 J5 IPC O 6 16 1 W4 nin SW1 ON sws ON JB2 JB1 Figure 5 503 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 35 5 lNSTALLATION K 2 Installing to the Copier Keep the following in mind when installing the Copy Data Controller A1 to the copier 1 Follow the appropriate laws and regulations of the country of installation 2 Be sure that the copier has been installed properly before starting the work 3 Be sure that the copier s power plug remains disconnected during the work 4 Be sure to identify the screws by type length diameter and location 5 Be sure to prepare settings data for the unit on the computer at the service station for remote control only 1 Remove the four screws 2 and remove the face plate 1 of the copier s rear cover Figure 5 506 2 Cut th
9. 4 1 D Lower Feeding Assembly 4 23 A Main Power Switch and Others 4 1 E Registration Roller Assembly 4 23 B Handling the Harnesses 4 2 F Delivery Assembly 4 24 ll EXTERNALSuu terea 4 3 4 27 A External 4 3 A Illuminating Assembly 4 27 B Inside 4 4 B CCD aaa 4 28 C Control 4 6 C citroen te 4 29 D CHIESE LUI 4 7 D Laser Scanner Assembly 4 30 DRIVE ASSEMBLY 4 8 VI DEVELOPING SYSTEM 4 32 A Scanner Drive Assembly 4 8 A Developing Assembly 4 32 B Fixing Drive Assembly 4 13 VII FIXING 4 34 C Duplexing Unit Inlet Motor Mount A Fixing Assembly 4 34 Assembly 4 14 VIII ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 4 37 D Set Back Roller Motor Assembly 4 14 A DC Controller PCB 4 37 E Pick Up Drive Assembly 4 15 B Composite Power Supply PCB 4 37
10. C Attach the shortest pin to 3 Rear Front Figure 4 308 r Note The pin of the mirror positioning tool FY9 3009 040 will not be used for the machine COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 11 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5 Adjusting the Position of the Mirror optical length of No 1 mirror and No 2 No 3 mirror 1 Prepare the mirror positioning tool 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount in the forward direction to match the hole in the front upper side plate and the hole in the slide assembly of the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 mirror mount Do the same for the rear side plate 3 Set the mirror positioning tool to the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 mirror mount both front and rear For rear No 1 mirror mount For front No 2 No3 mirror Figure 4 309 4 Tighten the set screw of the pulley 5 Remove the tool 4 12 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww sFSuTssss w 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM B Fixing Drive Assembly COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Removing the Fixing Drive Assembly Disconnect the power plug Remove the four screws and remove the rear cover Remove the three screws and remove the flywheel Remove the two screws and disconne
11. 4 34 C Duplexing Unit Inlet Motor Mount A Fixing Assembly 4 34 Assembly 4 14 VIII ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 4 37 D Set Back Roller Motor Assembly 4 14 A DC Controller PCB 4 37 E Pick Up Drive Assembly 4 15 B Composite Power Supply PCB 4 37 IV PICK UP ASSEMBLY 4 18 C Replacing the ROM DIMM Pick Up Assembly 4 18 image processor 4 38 B Multifeeder Assembly 4 20 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM I BEFORE THE WORK POINTS TO NOTE A Main Power Switch and Others Be sure to turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power plug before starting disassem bly assembly work In addition observe the following 1 The secondary battery starts to operate discharge when the main power switch is turned OFF to retain fax memory images Be sure to finish any work performed with the main power switch off within one hour to save the bat tery The machine must be kept powered for at least one week after installation 2 You can check whether there is a fax memory image by referring to the memory tx rx indicator on the control panel The memory tx rx lamp is ON when
12. Figure 4 207 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww sFSuTssss w 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Shift the locking lever 5 to release the devel 6 Slide out the upper cassette oping assembly then remove the knob 6 7 Remove the five screws 10 and remove the from the drum unit to remove the drum unit inside cover 4 Shift back the locking lever 5 to lock the developing assembly in place Figure 4 208 Figure 4 210 5 Release the feeding assembly and remove the feeding lever 7 1 top ring 8 and the registration roller knob 9 Figure 4 209 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 5 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM C Control Panel 4 Remove the screw and remove the magnet plate from the top of the control panel 5 Remove the four screws 4 and remove and 1 Control Panel turn over the control panel 3 1 Remove the inside cover 2 Remove the screw and disconnect the RS232C connector w 3 Remove the screw 2 and remove the fixing attention to d Tour connectors con nected to the control panel when removing controller PCB and turning over the control panel
13. Input method Card ID Table 5 502 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Caution LED1 LED2 LED3 1 If you set bit 4 of the DIP switch SW5 on the Copy Data Controller A1 to OFF group control will not be executed and the notation will be as follows O LED2 LED3 Sw2 LED4 1405 LED6 LED5 a JB1 SW4 Figure 5 516 P i 2 If the copier has been used for ID input kak kikiki using its own memory the registered ID numbers may be used for the Copy Data Controller A1 by performing the following SW1 3 SW1 2 SW1 1 SWA Figure 5 517 a Set the DIP switch SW1 on the Copy Data Controller A1 as follows Position ON Table 5 503 b Press the switch SW4 of the Copy Data Controller A1 LED5 will turn ON momentarily in response to a press on the switch SW4 LED5 will turn ON when the data has been drawn out If the attempt to draw out the data has failed LED5 will start to flash if such is the case press the switch SW4 once again and check that LED5 flashes The copier cannot discharge paper while data is being drawn d Set the DIP switch SW1 of the Coy Data Controller A1 as shown LED5 remains OFF Position OFF Table 5 504 C
14. Laser driver i Printer Board CIST Printer Board D A Densi 4 Printer Board D A Density D A Density ity 4 conversion conversion correction conversion Video Video processing Video processing processing FAX Board Trial Shot Printer Board Test Printing 600 800 dpi ePrinter Board Font List 400 dpi or CIST disabled Analog Image processor PCB FAX Board Analog Image processor PCB CORE IP Board FAX FAX Board Analog processor processor Mother processor PCB PCB board PCB Rotation Image Rotation coding CCD processor pesi coding CCD RA Ratio decoding 7 PCB Ratio decoding PCB Ratio decoding resolution resolution resolution conversion conversion conversion Image processor PCB CORE I FAX Board Image Rotation processor Pinay coding Protocol Protocol Controller Controller Protocol Controller Printer Board D A Density
15. Binary processing Density PD a Shading Reproduction Edge correction ratio emphasis Reversal Synthesis correction aser D A Image processor PCB conversion SCSI board Y Telephone line Density Binary NCU _ correction processing ED FAX Board 4 gt gt I Resolution Rotation COCIng modem Y conversion decoding memory repoduction controller ratio E Memory xpansion Protocol Controller Board memor d Rotation Memory Command M Conversion emoy Smoothing SCSI control Video controller DP RAM LAN VF Host controller controller computer x Printer Board NIB Host computer I I Li 7 LAN IL T 3 154 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Flow of Image Signals to the Scanner Board a In the case of reading mode binary
16. Indication Description L ORG FEED Indicates the large size original pick up count S ORG FEED Indicates the small size original pick up count SCAN TOTAL Indicates the total scan count COPY SCAN Indicates the scan count for copier mode FAX SCAN Indicates the scan count for fax mode PDL SCAN Indicates the scan count for printer mode ETC SCAN Indicates the scan count for other system PRINT JAM Indicates the print jam count DH JAM Indicates the feeder jam count COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 237 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING J 7 ACC accessory mode Use this mode to adjust operate options Each press on the key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen Press the item to adjust operate to that it becomes highlighted Use the keypad to enter numerals A press on the key will permanently store the value After operation turn off and then on the rear main power switch 1 Adjusting the Original Stop Position for the RDF This screen is effective only when an RDF is installed 7 ACC 01 DOC ST T P INTRVL T DOC ST B P INTRVL B Ct Item Function Description DOC ST T Use it to adjust the origi nal stop position for upper separation pick up P INTRVL T Use it to adjust the origi nal stop position for upper separation
17. 3 130 E 2 DISPLAY V O display mode 3 178 PAN S esce senno 3 139 3 ADJUST adjustment mode 3 197 A Functions and Operaitons 3 139 G 4 FUNCTION function mode 3 208 VIII POWER SUPPLY 3 141 5 OPTIN settings 3 228 A eicere 3 141 1 6 COUNTER counter mode 3 234 B SLEEP 3 145 J 7 ACC accessory mode 3 238 SYSTEM iere 3 148 K Electrical System 3 242 A Basic Operation 3 148 SELF DIAGNOSIS 3 261 B Diagram of the Function Boards 3 150 cdi 3 261 C Flow of Image Signals 3 154 B Self Diagnosis of the RDF G1 3 266 SERVICE MODE 3 158 C Self Diagnosis of the ADF F1 3 266 OUTING ettet 3 158 D Self Diagnosis of the Pedestal 3 267 B Using Service Mode 3 159 E Self Diagnosis of the C Using Adjustment Mode and Settings Multi Output Tray C1 3 267 uere ST 3 160 Self Diagnosis of the D 1 DISPLAY control display mode 3 161 Multi Output Tray 12 3 268 CHAPTER 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM BEFORE THE WORK C Feeding Assembly 4 21 POINTS TO
18. DC f DC PA1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Guide to the Screen DC PB1 DC PC1 DC PA0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX DC DC bit 15 bit 0 DC 2 iis gt gt C Address Indication i Jack Logic PA0 input J109 3 J113 B9 J113 A11 J113 A5 J109 6 J114 10 J114 A11 J114 A12 J114 A2 J113 A8 J113 B6 J117 7 J114 B7 J112 6 film detected closed paper present paper present paper present paper not present paper not present paper present paper present right door close waste toner full toner present locked locked O ma J110 2 J110 3 J110 4 J110 5 J110 6 J110 8 J110 9 J110 10 J110 11 J110 12 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 181 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Address i Indication re pick up unit front paper J103 2 0 paper present detection PS11 duplexing unit inlet paper J105 B2 0 paper present detection PS12 delivery paper detection J105 A2 0 paper present PS13 bin 2 paper detection J104 4 bin 3 paper detection J104 5 bin 3 inlet paper detection J104 6 horizont
19. 5 vl vio VIVIVIVIVIVIVIV v v gt 3 151121 la a olal laee 5 ge 9 58 ge ols Sia 21212212 2 2 212 2 15 N HEH 5 21 2 2 212 912 10 oz o 8 2 gt gt T as 1 44 2414 424 404 4 04 94 bd a lt lt 54 q 454540404 1 J501 4561 J526 4618 990000000 ejoa gt o gt gt o nl 011 14 61 08 900000000 1 00000 177 4184 4501 Jso2 JSD3 SuPLLY F Laser driver PCB RS 232C I 0654 nnn 4505 4506 4507 J508 4680 CHECK 4 11111173 z TO TO TO FLASH CRIP EDITER MEMORY as LED 816 ON KETUROX CNV_OFF ovo B tree D O OOD Tomo ot wf 01 01 01 0 01 2939099 SIZEV a 0vO 5 al 4 N C SIZEV l 0522 29 a 90 34 u c 71 SIZEV gt 260 20 4 OD SIZEV Original size sensor 1 Original size sensor 3 gt lt l Original size sensor 2 Original size sensor 4 gt gt 4
20. 5 16 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC G Machine Specifications Setting Mode 5 5 18 H Fax Settings for machines equipped with fax functions 5 19 1 Checking the Copy Images 5 24 RELOCATING THE MACHINE 5 30 INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V 5 31 COPY DATA CONTROLLER A1 5 34 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION SELECTING THE SITE Make the following considerations when selecting the site if possible pay a visit to the user s before the delivery of the machine a The site must provide a power outlet whose rating is as specified b The site must be 7 5 to 32 5 in temperature and 5 to 85 in humidity Avoid areas near water faucets water boilers humidifiers and refrigerators C Avoid areas near sources of fire or areas subject to dust or ammonium gas Avoid areas subject to direct rays of the sun as necessary provide curtains d The site must be well ventilated e The site must have a level floor so that all feet of the machine are in contact and the machine will remain level f The site must allow at least 10 cm of space between the machine and any wall for maintenance work See the next page g The terminal of the telephone line is a modular type Otherwise you need to convert it into a modular type COP
21. tA SA 8A D 8 REM 8 M areko ov oA NOTANI 8 IS 45 gt 1014 Lol orou 5798 tid lol dI s 1 08 15 T er 05742 HR 2 72 555 w osos 40 220o sv lot nares iB I c ossu OUQLS 0990 gt lt 2 e jotari ASt ut sel xHd stg Lr 1000 tod ase 322 i turr B zurr 4 z 2699 8 83S WOLINOW Ov eod 1815 ZEE 96 aee a 9 990 v69u 1690226902 999 SEI nuo fS ud LM 19 SV NOT E Dy 2 i E 0926 o 2 00925 T 92 cc 05 1990 9998 I RT T 4 D 5 8 m 2 2 2 00 1836 1290 92 go ssou 2 AS V 9695 6 99 _ OY ase 5690 wrod 7 2599 193106 L lt SEE 4698 asa eT se AS 0295 0195 4298 929u 7795 AS 75719 d oz9u 3299 z199 7192 cars 5798 96 arzo0 Et9u 2728 990 2082 5 200 99 1199 6096 of abou 1094 o AS HAP2 5575 vo
22. Figure 3 804 3 146 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND Reference SLEEP 2 power saving mode As mentioned SLEEP 2 power saving mode is a state in which only the CPU of the composite power supply PCB is supplied with power and the machine moves from SLEEP 2 to SLEEP 1 or standby state in response to fax reception off hook including off hook of extensions or when the control panel power switch is pressed When moving from SLEEP 2 the CPU on the DC controller PCB and the image processor PCB are initialized and the machine executes initial rotation INTR1 initial rotation 1 Since the CPU on the image processor PCB does not recognize the selection of no sound incoming mode the machine generates a sound once or twice If the user wants to suppress the sound or the initial rotation when the machine moves out of SLEEP 2 set the power saving switch to SLEEP 1 top SLEEP 1 provides an anti condensation function for areas around the scanner system but SLEEP 2 does not have this function OSS SL 222 Top SLEEP 1 Bottom SLEEP 2 SLEEP 1 SLEEP 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED I
23. increase Separation static eliminator bias drive circuit gt 5 T101 drive circuit Separation static eliminator drive siganl 2 Separation static eliminator c gt 2 drive siganl 1 2 a CPU J209 B7 J209 A4 A9 J102 B4 J102 A1 A7 Separation static Serial communication eliminator ON OFF signal IC101 CPU DC controller PCB Figure 3 507 3 68 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www 3 OPERATIONS AND F Controlling the Transfer Guide Fixing Roller Bias 1 Transfer Guide Bias The transfer guide bias is used to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide and has a negative potential C600 VDC as in the case of toner The application continues as long as the control panel power remains ON 2 Lower Fixing Roller Bias A positive component is applied to the steel core of the lower fixing roller to prevent offset to the fixing film The terminal on the lower fixing roller shaft is for this purpose pay attention to the orientation of the lower roller if you have removed it Fixing Photosensitive assembly drum Composite power supply PCB om e T101 Sx ra Transfer guide 78 o 0 2 5
24. Ej LLL p o o 9 9 am 5 Figure 4 415 7 Release the hook assembly 8 of the feeding fan cover 7 with a small flat blade screwdriver 8 Remove the feeding fan Figure 4 416 4 22 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww sFSuTssss w 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM D Lower Feeding Assembly E Registration Roller Assembly 1 Remove the inside cover and the pick up mount 2 Set the feeding assembly i e lock it in place 1 Removing the Registration Roller 1 Remove the following 3 Remove the two Screws 2 and remove the DC controller PCB front door support right CD harness guide Power supply mount Drive unit Developing assembly Drum unit 2 Remove the screw 7 spring 2 and two E rings 3 from the rear of the machine Figure 4 417 4 Remove the three screws 3 and remove the lower feeding assembly 5 Disconnect the connector of the lower feeding assembly and remove the lower feeding assembly Figure 4 419 Figure 4 418 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 23 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Remove the screw spring 5 and two E F Delivery Asse
25. gt n HEATER gt T3 L 1 3 a z ss 1 8 YT qe Hoo alaala 88646 lt 4 5 888 a E 85 al gt m I9izig2 445 2 of Zl gt 3 Sjelle Plo a x Zia 2 el 5 28 20 28151831 21518 als EF ale Pick up roller 15 215 15 I 51519191518 Akaka kikata 5 2 c do 1195 DOWN solenoid oja ajm el zie sia 144 44 1 44 4 3 33 cm 4 2222 F F J122 J110 3107 4111 J113 J103 J109 J104 4117 J124 0445 146 DC controller J119 D 00 00000 815 gt 0000 n 00000000 x cs D D Bad ai Lu Dk e r ejo 2 e 3 2 zjx o gt ES EIE lla lu gt 45 lt a x 3 x E NEM ol 1 51 pA 21 255532 14621 2158 _ vip b z 199 gl LD 8 8958 41 3 44 wis 285242265 E 5 a CIII 000000 P 5 el Fixing temperature amp detection 5 M2 d Scanner motor 3 L e x Ur 00 2 fil o Fixing main temperature gt Fixing
26. 2 5 Y E Binding Erase 7mm 8 Book Frame Erase 4 Binding Erase w n y y 25MM 1 2 5 1 22 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Key Description SPECIAL FEATURES Image Creation You can select any of the following modes after pressing the Image Create key Mirror Image Original Image Repeat Negative Positive D E F Reversal Slant Image Slant mode Slect from between 45 and 45 Mirror mode Select from three patterns Image repeat mode Specify 2 to 20 repetitions in main scanning direction Negative positive reversal DEF Image Comb You can reduce two or four originals to copy on a single sheet of copy paper For details see the Operators Manual as the specifics vary depending on the copier model and options configuration idi Original 4 on 1 2 1 mode 2 on 1 Two Sided 4 in 1 mode 2 in 1 mode Two Sided Projector You can use a film projector to copy photo film which may be either of four types 35mm Negative 35mm
27. A B Configuration Rotary Label Inch Configuration Rotary Label A B Configuration Rotary Label Inch Configuration Rotary Label Figure 3 624 Rotary Labels r Note 1 The notation U is in reference to the following U1 FOOLSCAP U2 FOLIO UB K LGL R OFFICIO US A FLS A OFFICIO UA G LTR E OFFICIO U5 G LTR R B OFFICIO U6 G LGL A LGL U7 K LGL Note 2 The notation SP 1 2 special 1 2 is in reference to modes which may be used after registering default sizes of the user s choice in user mode An icon may be selected to represent the SPECIAL cassette for display on the control panel For details see the Operators Manual COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 97 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Note 3 The notation ENV 1 2 envelope 1 2 is in reference to a mode in which five types of envelopes may be registered If the option envelope kit is not installed to the uppermost cassette the machine will not feed envelopes Shorter side X x T Ape Longer side Y COM10 104 7 x 241 3 mm Monarch 98 4 x 190 5 mm DL 110 x 220 mm C5 162 x 229 mm B5 176 x 250 mm Table 3 607 Envelope Sizes 10 Monarch DL x C5 B5 s Figure 3 625 Shape of Envelope 3 98 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 199
28. DC controller PCB J73 5V Re pick up L 2 5 paper sensor 511 _ J79 4105 5 B3 Duplexing assembly inlet paper sensor cl Bi L J89 J69 4105 SV C A2 Del PDP7 PS13 Eu E J92 J66 114 Holizontal rss apas 1 B2 cRGPD 14 J Bi sensor J110 E CSZ14 Upper cassette 4 CSZ13 size detection 3 CSZ12 2 CSZ11 CSZ10 J110 pe Lower casette 5223 size detection 5222 8 220 ____7 L J60 J113 15 Multifeeder paper gt A14 width detection OC Figure 3 109 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC analog signal CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON When PS11 has detected paper 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS11 When PS12 has detected paper 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS12 When PS13 has detected paper 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS13 When PS14 has detected the edge of paper 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS14 See p 3 176 See p 3 176 Detects the width of copy paper stacked in the multifeeder 3 11 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING nputs to the DC Controller PCB 3 3 DC controller PCB J26 J27 4112 15V 12V 1 Scanning lamp X O T dal intensity sensor 415 FLS See p 3 24 J105 Drum ambient TH B10 RTEMP petects the te
29. Direct Reduce Enlarge i Original image data writing Line memory reading Copy Reproduction ratio in main scanning direc tion Reproduction ratio in sub scan ning direction COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC All data is written as it is into memory To reduce to 1 2 every other data unit is skipped when writing into memory To enlarge to 200 all data units are written as they are but read twice when reading from memor y The speed at which the scanner is moved is increased thereby increasing the width of scanning the original in relation to a single pixel Table 3 302 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON The speed at which the scanner is moved is decreased thereby decreasing the width of scanning the original in relation to a single pixel 3 35 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING b Shift Processing Figures 3 309 310 and 311 give samples of image shifting and conceptual outlines of shifting in main sub scanning direction Original Shaft in main scanning direction Main scannin 7 direction 5 oi T ss abc abc abc 070 Principle When data for a single scanning line is read from line memory reading is starte
30. Drum unit Drum cover 5 11 5 INSTALLATION KWwwws nr T 230 model Work Remarks Unpack the drum unit and Primary charging roller remove the two primary charging releasing roll Remove roller releasing rolls Hold the drum at its middle Primary charging roller when taking it out of the box releasing roll Remove prevent damage Check to make sure that the developing assembly is released insert the drum unit slowly along the rail Drum unit 5 12 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Fix the drum unit in place with the D it screw removed previously Screw rum uni Fill out the label and attach the label to the front cover of the gue _ raped date Datum compteur Z hler note Notiz drum unit Lock the developing assembly in place by operating the devel oping assembly releasing lever Lock the feeding assembly in place Developing assembly releasing lever 1 Feeding assembly releasing lever COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 13 5 INSTALLATION E Installing the Cassettes Work Remarks Slide out the cassett
31. Communication system fax Composite power supply Laser exposure system gt Image formation system Drum cleaning Developing cu a Fixing ration fe Transfer Lower feeding assembl Cassette 1 Cassette 2 PDL interpreter Others Pick up control e Multifeeder Pick up feeding system Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette 5 Cassette 6 Cassette pedestal option Figure 3 101 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 1 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gai B Outline of the Electrical Circuitry 1 Control Division The GP215 GP200 s electrical mechanisms are controller by the CPU on the PCBs shown in Figure 3 102 See Table 3 101 for an idea of the functions of the CPU and the functions of the ROMs RAMs and the ICs around the CPU a Image Processor PCB Description Controls image processing Controls laser operation Controls job schedules Controls fax sequence Controls system memory Detects errors Controls DC controller PCB communications Controls serial communications for FLASH ROM download ing Controls the control panel Controls the feeder editor Controls fax communications Controls copying sequence Controls the power supply Controls control panel communications ROM Contains control programs FLASH ROM Con
32. Item Description Reference page Test print output Select the desired test print press the item to high light then press the OK key L TEST1 solid black test print L TEST2 halftone test print L TESTS blank test print L TEST4 17 gradation test print L TEST5 grid test print L TEST6 vertical line test print L TEST7 horizontal line test print COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 217 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING D L TEST1 solid black test print Use it to check white spots or white lines f white spots are noted suspect dirt on the transfer charging roller or the separation static eliminator f white lines are noted suspect shading faults because of dirt on the standard white plate 2 L TEST2 halftone test print Use it to check for transfer faults black lines white lines or uneven intervals f transfer faults are noted vertical white spots suspect dirt on the transfer charging roller or the separation static eliminator f black lines are noted suspect scratches on the drum or dirt on the primary charging roller 3 218 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 3 L TEST3 blank test print Use itto check for fogging f fogging is noted suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum developing system or laser system 4 17 gradation test print Use it to check
33. Low voltage control error during copying The difference between the setting of the 24VR output and the actual control value is more than specified Upon detection error data will be sent to the DC controller PCB E803 will be indicated on the con trol panel Intervals of 8 sec 5 1V output control error 8sec Intervals of 10 sec 10sec Check sum error on the DC controller PCB 5 1V output is outside the specified range All outputs of the composite power supply PCB will be stopped so that the display indications on the control panel will also turn OFF The CPU on the DC controller PCB has detected a check sum error in the communication data twice in a row All outputs of the composite power supply PCB will be stopped E1921 will be indicated on the con trol panel The same error can occur when the fluorescent lamp has deteriorated over time or fails to turn ON As such if the LED flashes at intervals of 6 sec check to make sure that the inner side of the glass around the filament at both ends of the fluorescent lamp has not become black COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 75 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING VI PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM A Outline The GP215 GP200 uses center reference in which copy paper moves along the center of the pick up feeding assembly The pick up system consists of two c
34. Normal d Separation Paper Sensor Delay Jam A delay jam will be identified if copy paper does not reach the separation paper sensor PS6 within a specific period of time after the registration roller clutch CL1 has turned ON Jam message V SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV 5 Registration roller clutch 1 Separation sensor jam check Separation sensor PS5 1 Main motor M1 Normal Figure 3 659 Sequence for Separation Sensor Delay Jams COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 133 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KGwwswTs ss c raa e Fixing Assembly Paper Sensor Delay Jam A delay jam will be identified if copy paper does not reach the fixing rear paper sensor PS7 within a specific period of time after it has moved past the registration clutch CL 1 Jam message Y SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR S Registration roller clutch CL1 Fixing rear paper sensor jam check Fixing rear paper sensor Main motor M1 Figure 3 660 Sequence for Fixing Assembly Paper Sensor Delay Jams f Delivery Sensor Delay Jam A delay jam will be identified if copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor PS13 within a specific period of time after it has moved past the fixing rear paper sensor PS7 Jam message Y SCFW
35. 151 co aper Set back rollers Re pick up roller 6 The copy paper is moved in the same way the 1st copy paper was moved EN _____ 151 2nd copy paper Set back roller Re pick up roller By repeating the above operations as many as 20 sheets of copy paper are stacked in the lower feed ing assembly i e 20 sheets of LTR A4 G LTR K LGL B5 A5 or STMT COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 111 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG Figure 3 632 shows the sequence of operations used to stack sheets of copy paper in a staggered pat tern SCRV LSTR 5 Lower feeding assembly inlet roller motor M7 Ts ww Lower feeding assembly 1 1 inlet sensor PS12 5 Set back roller motor 1 1 1 M6 5 Flapper solenoid 514 CW CCW CW Re pick up front paper sensor PS11 Main motor M1 1 Varies according to the length of copy paper Figure 3 632 A4 2 copies Direct two sided overlay 3 112 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww ssri 3 OPERATIONS AND b Re Pick Up Operations copying on the 2nd side The sheets of copy paper stacked in the lower feeding assembly after copying on the first side are picked up by the re pic
36. 3 110 o 88 481 J105 B6 24V24V Duplexing assembly gt See p 3 108 inlet motor Ta 88 _ 9 188 05 A8 24V24V 11 9 Delivery reversing C L _ motor 3 127 GP215 only 4 L 1 J115 1 24V24V LA 1154 Horizontal motor Lb gt Seep 3 114 211 _ S j C 68 J99 Figure 3 111 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 13 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Outputs from the DC Controller PCB 2 3 Registration clutch Multifeeder pick up clutch Developing clutch Lower feeding assembly re pick up clutch Primary charging roller cleaning solenoid Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid Re pick up paper deflecting plate solenoid Delivery assembly paper deflecting plate solenoid Feeding fan Exhaust fan 1 Exhaust fan 2 Laser cooling fan System cooling fan 3 14 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC J114 B10 Cum acco J61 J114 B8 om e J38 J113 B13 DC controller PCB 24 0 24VU 24VU 4 J122 5 J63 J113 B1 24VU CL5D 24VU m J114 B12 24VU a 475 473 24VU Jn J69 J105 A4 Ter J107 A7 Soi th 5 J107 A9 aa lt J107 B1 J113 B3 QS 9 J112 9 Fig
37. Protocol Controller PCB System Motherboard and mode with a different page Print Board then execute test printing If the problem description language PDL may printer mages is not corrected perform the have been used Check the printer following settings of the option used If the If the machine is equipped with the FAX Board try settings are wrong explain the replacing the Protocol Controller PCB and the Printer situation to the user and ask for Board correction If the machine is not equipped with the FAX Board try replacing the FAX Motherboard CORE IP Board Protocol Controller PCB System Mother Board and the Printer Board COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 257 10 Isolating the PCBs FAX image fault A printer image is faulty Make a copy using the copier only YES Is the copy image normal NO Execute test printing in service mode YES Is the test print image normal NO Suspect a fault in the image formation system including the image processor PCB Make a correction according to the appropriate instructions in the service manual 3 258 Suspect a fault in the reading system mirror lens CCD analog processor PCB etc Make a correction according to the appropriate instructions in the Service Manual Execute FAX test printing
38. 9 TEES Figure 3 113 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 15 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gv D Main Motor Control PCB 1 Outline The main motor M1 is rotated and stopped in response to the drive signal MMD generated by the DC controller PCB thereby driving the follow ing loads Photosensitive drum Developing assembly Feeding assembly Fixing assembly Multifeeder pick up roller Registration roller Vertical path roller 1 2 Delivery roller 1 Lower feeding assembly outlet roller Its speed further is controlled by the main motor control PCB 2 Rotation The main motor is driven by DC 24 Vu sup plied by the composite power supply PCB When the drive signal MMD generated by the DC con troller PCB goes 1 the control circuit on the main motor control PCB turns ON to drive the drive cir cuit The drive circuit in turn supplies drive current suited to the control of the control circuit to the main motor to rotate the motor At this time the output of the hall IC is returned to the drive circuit thereby maintaining the rotation of the motor 3 16 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 3 Controlling the Speed The main motor M1 is a DC motor with a built in clock pulse generator which generates clock pulses MMCLK when the motor rotates according to the revolution of the motor The phase of the freq
39. 2 4 A QUINE 2 1 Transfer step 5 2 5 Latent Image Formation Block 2 2 H Separation step 6 2 6 C Pre Exposure step 1 2 3 I Fixing step 7 2 7 D Primary Charging step 2 2 3 J Dram Cleaning 2 7 E Laser Exposure step 3 2 4 Il AUXILIARY PROCESS 2 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 COPYING PROCESS I IMAGE FORMATION A Outline The GP215 GP200 uses an indirect photographic method of reproduction and is constructed as shown in Figure 2 101 Copyboard glass O Scanning lamp Lens GCD Image processing assembly Laser scanner iman charging Developing assembly da lamp Drum unit 9 assembly ba p _ Copy paper Fixing assembly LL eliminator E paper Transfer charging roller Figure 2 101 Latent image formation block 3 Laser exposure 4 Development PER CREDAT C 8 Drum cleaning Multifeeder lt Flow of copy paper Rotation of drum Figure 2 102 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON I
40. Description Settings Remarks Indicates the standard white paper data 0 65535 If you have initial density data of the standard white paper ized the RAM or 3 206 replaced the Indicates the standard white plate data image processor density data of the standard white plate PCB be sure to 0 65535 enter the value recorded on the service label COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 8 Adjusting the Transfer Charging Roller Bias 3 ADJUST 08 TRNS 1 lt TRNS 2TS lt TRNS 20L xxxxx lt Item Description Settings Remarks TRNS 1 Use it to adjust the transfer roller bias occur Make adjustments ring when copying on the 1st side if image faults occur because of TRNS 2TS Use it to adjust the transfer roller bias occur an incorrect trans ring when copying on the 2nd side of a two fer roller bias sided copy Guide f fogging TRNS 20L Use it to adjust the transfer roller bias occur caused by stray ring when copying on the 2nd side of an toner occurs in overlay copy the trailing edge margin increase the value If the density grows higher darker at intervals of about 94 mm when copying an entirely halftone image decrease the value Note Settings are between 0 and 10 however a
41. Image processing system Image processor CORE IP Board PCB Printer FAX 1 Laser beam Board Driver 428 Laser mirror Laser exposure system Figure 3 201 3 20 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Scanner motor Scanner home position sensor PS1 Forward 24 1 mirror mount Reverse om e Sn Mirror mount Figure 3 202 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 21 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gs w oEH RKwmm B Varying the Reproduction Ratio The reproduction ratio in the main scanning direction drum axis is changed by skipping reduction image signals when writing into line memory or reading a multiple number of times enlargement when reading from the line memory The reproduction ratio in the sub scanning direction on the other hand is changed by moving the mir ror mount faster reduction or slower enlargement C Sequence of Operations original exposure system control panel power switch ON Copy Start key ON 5 INTR SCFW SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY 2 n m 22 m O O 7 n 2 2 Forward Reverse Scanner motor M2 2 Scan
42. 4 Press the area where the OK key was shown The LCD will return to normal state SCAN LAMP checking activation of scan ning lamp 1 Press SCAN LAM to highlight 2 Press the OK key The scanning lamp will turn on 3 Press the OK key The scanning lamp will turn off DISP LED checking control panel LEDs COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 1 Press DISP ED to highlight 2 Press the OK key The LEDs on the control panel will turn on 3 Press the OK key The LEDs on the control panel will turn off CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 215 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 9 Laser 4 FUNCTION 09 gt LSR MRR START OFF OK WD AI Description Reference page LSR MRR 1 Press 1 5 to highlight then press the OK See 2 15 checking laser scanner key motor operation The laser scanner motor will start to rotate OFF 2 Press OFF to highlight then press the OK key Stopping operation to stop the laser scanner motor 3 216 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 10 Test Print 4 FUNCTION 10 gt L TEST1 OK START L TEST2 START L TEST3 START L TEST4 OK START OK OK OK L TEST5 START L TEST6 START L TEST7 START bPb
43. Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp Composite power supply PCB Scanning lamp fluorescent lamp Scanning lamp pre heat circuit Scanning lamp ON circuit Scanning lamp intensity sensor T101 Drive signal DC controller PCB IC 102 Gate array FLS IC101 CPU Figure 3 206 3 24 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON wwH s 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Controlling Pre Heating The filament of the scanning lamp is powered so as to speed up the time in which the intensity of the scanning lamp reaches its optimum value after a press on the Copy Start key This mecha nism is called pre heating Pre heating may be full pre heating or scan ning lamp ON pre heating a Full Pre Heating Power is applied during initial rotation b ON Pre Heating Power is applied during copying operation 3 Turning ON OFF the Scanning Lamp The scanning lamp is turned ON OFF by the lamp ON signal FLPWM of the DC controller PCB The FLPWM signal is sent to the logic circuit together with MPCLK pulse signals generated by the composite power supply PCB The logic circuit uses these two signals to generate the scanning lamp ON signal thereby turning ON the scanning lamp COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 Controlling the Intensity The FLPWM signal is
44. Figure 4 707 Removing the Lower Fixing Roller Slide out the fixing unit 2 Remove the releasing spring 1 Figure 4 705 em 3 Removing the Upper Fixing Guide fixing rear sensor 1 Slide out the fixing unit 2 Push the hook assembly D and slide the upper fixing guide 2 to the rear to remove C2 C5 5 C5 C5 Cq C C C I cr _ i Fu toz Hj F Y Figure 4 708 LU 4 aa 0 TV Mr 1 Cin K Figure 4 706 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 35 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Remove the E ring 3 and remove the lever 6 Remove the separation claw 2 at the front 7 Remove the lower fixing roller Caution The lower fixing roller shaft is in contact with an electrode at the rear of the machine and has a rear front orientation Install it with care so that it is oriented correctly Install it so that the side with a boss of the lower fixing roller is toward the rear of the machine Lower fixing roller end Figure 4 709 Boss to remain in contact 4 Remove the E ring 6 and remove the lever with an electrode 5 at the rear Figure 4 712 Rear of the Shaft End electrode side Fixing lower roller end _ Figure 4 710 5 Remove the two locking spri
45. ON ON DC controller communication ON DC controller communication ON DC controller communication OO N PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC O Q N O PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 179 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gwwwr rwI TOOIIm irO Address pede Indication Logic PB2 output STOP CCD control B H CCD control ABC OFF CCD control CS CCD control LD RS CCD control CLK CCD control SIN UD CCD control PRESCAN CCD control N O bias ON laser control power SW 0 laser control marker ON for editing board PAD OFF for editing board power SW1 laser control area signal switching 1 w editing board installed OONN oO Not used Post ratio change reversal switching NO 3 180 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Inputs to and Outputs from the DC Controller PCB 2 DISPLAY 02 DC DC PBO
46. xi SISIE RENE e EET ETE x ew SY lt lt 5151 51 6101 oloojw u u o ojojo N RING z RTN2 RTN3 RTNS DGT15 DGT16 D6T17 w DST18 RTN7 RTNB RTNS RTN10 RTN11 Function switch vier Eo iT Tol Q OO To dots ovo One touch diat Image processor PCB CCV COUNT Control panel CPU PCB D RTNO GTO BKLTON PE DSTS 4 DGT6O RTN9 LCD intensity LCD LCD back light power supply Service switch 21 42 2 31412 21 4 5 1 p 0677 ATNIS 0616 e 2619 _ P g RIN16 057130 RINiS RTNi4 4 DGT12 c 4 ATN12 Touch panel COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A 5 General Circuit Diagram 4 4 41003 CHECK Beam detection Analog processor PCB DC controller PCB POWER J1001 444 SUPLLY y d 5 5 T 2 0000000000000000000000000 600060000000000000000000000000800000 amp on 5 2 T an alalalalalalala 2 5 55 3 z z z z z z z z z A u x X
47. 4 The stack surface rises in response to the rising lifter since the height of the pick up roller shaft will also increase the spring pulls the lever to restrain the cam Feeding roller Lever Pick up roller shaft Lever Pick up roller Lifter Copy paper Lifter up lt Lifter at Rest gt Figure 3 608 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 85 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG b Releasing the Lifter The lifter drive is released mechanically in that it is released when the cassette is slid out As many as two types of claws are at work one moving up the lifter and one holding the lifter When the machine is in standby state the lifter gear is supported by the retaining claw when the cassette is slid out the retain ing claw is released to let the lifter down r Caution If the main power supply is cut off while the lifter is moving up the claw used to move up the lifter can hold up the lifter while remaining in contact with the lifter gear depending on when the power is removed Such a condition may not fully release the lifter so it is important to turn OFF and ON the main power to start standby state Forcing the casstte out in such a condition can result in damage 3 86 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 3 OPERATIONS AND
48. APPENDIX DC Controller Circuit Diagram 5 13 0 CQ N m o gt gt o gt o gt 86 lt E 8 4 S o 10 o a I 1 S 1 u 2 V 8 2y E maT A x m 45 amp m 9 S 5 E A21 0190 R1 9192 R13 0193 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A 11 APPENDIX DC Controller Circuit Diagram 6 13 BLU RED 5 csi L 25 16114 4116 ot c gl NER 4 4 11111111113 2 ____ e 1 111111 i amapas isa Es ES 5 ti NEAR 0108 5 5 331 i 1 do 12 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 9 eorr 4 i HdAH 0 H2 gt zorr eoin XTWIAH 9 t 492 2 zorr XXIV 90 624 AS 1427 tWv3N 001031 zorr UE EN APPENDIX 5 5 5 5 8 gt m Al vi Ovd zorr 37257 dd 4 DC Controller Circuit Diagram 7 13 AST n r2 E 92 torr 20 torr 92 v92 zasu 9 tor TASU 107 124 790 torr 999 4 13 CANON GP
49. COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 5 5 INSTALLATION B Supplying Toner Work Remarks Hold the ivory color grip and pull out the developing assembly to the front until it stops Developing assembly Ivory color grip Shake the toner cartridge several times Set the toner cartridge in the developing assembly and push it down until the opening knob comes off The toner cartridge will be locked to the developing assembly and the opening knob of the toner cartridge will come off Toner cartridge Open close knob 5 6 While holding the toner cartridge pull out the opening knob to the front until it stops COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Tap lightly on the top of the toner cartridge so that all toner will fall off Push the black cover of the devel oping assembly back into its orig inal position The toner cartridge will come off Remove the toner cartridge Push in the developing assembly until it stops Turn the developing assembly locking lever in the direction of the arrow to lock the developing assembly in place Developing assembly locking lever COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 RE
50. Do not touch the face of the stamp If your hands become stained with ink wash them immediately ADF F1 Open the ADF cover and remove the protection sheet from the separation assembly and the stamp cap Do not touch the face of the stamp If your hands become stained with ink wash them immediately COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Protection sheet CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Install the original delivery tray B RDF G1 Use two screws Original delivery tray hinge cover Original tray Original delivery tray hinge B ADF F1 Use two screws Screws Original delivery tray Connect the signal cable of the RDF or the ADF to the copier COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 17 5 INSTALLATION G Machine Specifications Setting Mode 5 Work Remarks Turn ON the main power switch Press the user mode key and set the following items Date Time Press the service switch and will be indicated in the upper left of the LCD and the press the key twice Service Mode Menu screen will be displayed Press OPTION 5 to highlight then press the OK key Select the item to set Ex COPY LIM upper limit of copy count SHUT OFF ON OFF of switch to sleep mode
51. FLSC standing for FOOLSCAP 3 A LGL OFFI standing for OFICIO 4 B OFI OFP standing for Ecuadorian OFICIO 5 A OFI LGL standing for Argentine LEGAL OFFI standing for Bolivian OFICIO OFFI standing for Argentine OFICIO COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 231 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Setting the Mode of Notation for the U2 through 08 Cassettes universal cas settes 2 through 8 5 OPTION 4 CST U2 U2 CST U3 U3 CST U4 U4 CST U5 U5 CST U6 U6 CST U7 U7 CST U8 U8 Pb Function Description Use it to turn on off the U 0 If the paper size dial of the cassette is set Size cassette name to U2 through U8 U1 U8 will be indicated on the LCD If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to U2 through U8 the following will be indi cated Paper Notation 3 232 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 Setting the Mode of Notation for the LTR LTRR Cassette CST LTR 5 OPTION 5 CSTLTR 0 LTR 1 CST LTRR 0 LTRR 0 lt 0 1 A LTRR 0 lt 0 Ct Function Use it to select the paper name notation for the LTR size cassette Description If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to
52. Printer Board D A Density conversion correction conversion correction 1 Printer Board D A Density conversion correction Video Video processing processing Video processing 3 Board Video Testing Printer Board Test Printing 400 dpi or CIST disabled Network Interface Board Test Printing Analog Image processor PCB CORE IP Board FAX Board Analog Image processor PCB CORE IP Board FAX Board Analog Image processor FAX Board processor processor processor PCB PCB PCB Image Rotation Image Rotation processor Binary B Image Rotation ina i Bi processing ak CCD processor Memory CCD processor coding PCB Ratio ecoding PCB Ratio g PCB Ratio lecoding resolution resolution resolution conversion conversion conversion Protocol Protocol Protocol Controller Controller Controller Laser driver Laser driver System A Printer Board Printer Board D A Densit
53. S yis Yi T5 NE HAW zoro coro 2098 corH vOru tOPO 4 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 32 s APPENDIX Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 5 8 sesa 60502 2155 85 9199 cesy 9658 65 amp 193106971 6950 eso AS 4060 2158 sas 6esu e NT L 3055 RI 2 Lii amp 2050 L Naver 33 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX KGwwrIi FO Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 6 8 lus 0 98 wud svi has esa wad 20d vs 3998 9044 s WM 250 55 4 2 9894 t490 sesa 2498 2290 18 gt 1 6599 4 0695 Age gt 2290 6692 wN02G m t 299 ANT 2 p gal U3H10W Xv3 5 13184733 9 Y waver 18366 P Oo 0 so so 294 BO ast 4 ME SiON 30 NO kor oso vosy 4J ANO Ast Em Ord oso t 35 2 moans ns 9 OT 55 HP mnc s OT ria 95000 es Bus 0990 8 her 918 091 1595 F ra Coin vit H Md ANO h 0
54. ev lt 4 gt orb a 2 eorr 20 0 133 t eorr 2050 oF lt P gt eorr eorr VYAve eorr 5 eorr 9 AS AS U3 Net 60tr eorr goin eor THL t 237N 2t 8 09r 4 tt corr 9H11H oy Aves ast ANO wed LINN SNIXIJ NOILdO O21NO 1 101 OT INO x3 5 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 16 w a DC Controller Circuit Diagram 11 13 NYJ N30 B 2215 T Fl 2852 T SJ WA0d LH 15 216 T N H E 5 gt 6976 tity 982 580 veo HOOT WA T0d eztu x gt zavr 2 0 924 attr O WAO ok ES 3 11 11 89819 5855 vite gt 5 Q o Q AST 824 184 gt AS TASH AS 8 toro A9U 17 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 0598 wO AIi s 4113 4113 ID 4 N nin XOdS21 attr nOdSs f x vote sin voto o gr vote
55. 1 Inputs Outputs to and from the Image Processor PCB 1st screen 2 O DISPLAY 01 Xxxxxxxx IP PBO IP PCO Guide to the Screen PA1 IP PB1 IP PC1 2 PB2 PC2 bit 7 bit 0 Address 5 ect Indication PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal Not used Not used OIT OONN O connect 1 not connected connect 2 not connected editor board connect connected CCF connect connected PCB internal signal power saving mode switch ON Not used main power switch ON O OIT OONN 3 178 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Address o Indication PC0 input O Z OO N O OI OO N NOOR WP LCD back light CCV count sleep mode switch PCB internal signal DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW interrupt scanner start registration roller ON PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal count saving mode connect
56. 4 on the 4 FUNCTION 04 screen to highlight then press EU PD PRINT START the OK key WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY SANPLING OK Press the key to turn DATA SET pages to the PD Density B xxx D xxx 5 XX XX XX XX XX XX Automatic Adjustment screen Xx XY OX XX MULTI 0 gt CASSETTE1 4 1 CASSETTE 2 4 1 qq JC Close the front cover halfway and press PD PRINT on the screen to highlight then press the Copy Start key The copier will generate a test pattern You will use the Test Pattern later 5 26 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Automatic Density Adjustment Place a blank white sheet of copy paper A4 LTR or larger not for color copiers but the whitest of all used by the user on the copyboard glass Then close the feeder or the copy board cover Press WHITE MEASURE on The scanner makes a single scan the screen to highlight then press the OK key Place the Test Pattern as Place the Test Pattern against the V marking in the rear shown on the copyboard glass left of the copyboard glass If the sheet is not placed and close the feeder the copy correctly adjustment may not be accurate board cover Then press DENSITY MEA Place the pattern print as follows
57. 4 77 sensor detecting i copy paper shifted to the rear Figure 3 402 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 53 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Ga C Laser Driver Circuit 1 Operation The optical output of the laser semiconductor laser is affected largely by changes occurring in the ambient temperature The GP215 GP200 uses a control mechanism which varies the laser drive current automatically to suit the ambient temperature thereby ensuring a specific output When the Copy Start key is pressed the image processor PCB sends the bias control signal and the laser drive signal LSRD to the laser driver PCB so as to drive the bias control circuit and the con stant current circuit on the laser PCB thereby turning ON the laser beam The laser beam is detected by the pin photodiode PD built into the laser element and the PD photo output voltage is returned to the bias control circuit The photo output voltage is sample held and compared against the reference voltage from the laser intensity setting circuit thereby determining the value of the laser bias current This laser bias current is varied continuously in conjunction with the changes in temperature to ensure a specific output Figure 3 404 A series of these operations is executed for each signal line of scanning Sample hold Laser driver PCB signal SH Intensity selection signa
58. Ct Item Description Reference page Stirring toner inside the devel Press START on the screen to highlight then oping assembly at installation press the OK key to start stirring the toner inside the developing assembly At the same time TONER 5 240 in sec starts to increment the operation stops at 0 To stop in the middle press STOP to highlight and press the OK key to stop COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 209 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Shading Auto Correction 4 FUNCTION 03 gt AUTO SHADING START OK START Now WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH GDA1 xxH GD2 xxH CDAS3 xxH CDA4 ADDAS5 xxH D ODD xxH D EVN xxH JU Operation Reference page Shading auto correction for 1 Press AUTO SHADING START on the screen to servicing in the field highlight then press the OK key 2 The notation END indicates the end of the opera tion Guide to the Screen 4 FUNCTION 03 CANCEL AUTO SHADING START OK START Now Status indication WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH GDA1 GDA2 xxH xxH CDA4 ADDA5 xxH D ODD xxH D EVN xxH Results of measurement under each item WO GIGI 3 210 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINT
59. Figure 4 318 3 Vertical Path Assembly Remove the following Pick up unit p 4 18 Pick up drive unit p 4 15 Remove the two rolls and disconnect the con nector then remove the multifeeder assem bly Remove the two screws 1 from behind the machine Figure 4 319 Release the feeding lever and remove the three screws to remove the feeding lever and the feeding assembly locking assembly 5 Remove the screw 2 grounding screw 3 and E ring 4 Figure 4 320 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 6 Disconnect the connector 6 and remove the vertical path assembly J Q x H 5 2 1 Figure 4 321 4 Horizontal Registration Motor 1 Remove the following Pick up unit p 4 18 Pick up drive unit p 4 15 Vertical path unit p 4 16 2 Remove the two screws 2 and disconnect the two connectors 3 then remove the hori zontal registration motor Figure 4 322 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5 Developing Clutch 1 Remove the rear cover 4 screws flywheel 3 Screws and harness retainer high voltage cord 2 Remove the two screws and disconnect the connector 3 then remove the
60. Laser scanner motor 6 facet mirror Laser drive signal Laser scanner motor drive PCB Imaging BD PCB lens laser scanner motor drive signal Laser mirror Laser driver PCB BD mirror Photosensitive drum Figure 3 401B 3 52 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 3 OPERATIONS AND B Generating the BD Signal A laser ON signal horizontal sync signal is needed when directing a laser beam to the photosensitive drum and the laser beam detection signal BD is used to generate such a start signal The GP215 GP200 is designed to detect the edge of copy paper which has been re picked up for two sided overlay copying to measure the discrepancy if any toward the rear front Using the result of this measurement the laser ON timing is varied in relation to the BD signal to ensure that the image will be at a specific position on every copy For details on how the end of copy paper is detected see p 3 114 Laser scanner unit Polygon mirror 6 facet Imaging lens BD detection PCB Photosensitive drum Image area Laser ON Laser OFF Image area when shifted to the rear Laser ON Laser OFF Copy paper shifted to the rear Horizontal registration Image area iid 9 Horizontal registation
61. One sided 1 Requires an RDF on 4 One Sided MODE MEMORY M1 through M5 REC Most Recent 2nd Most Recent 3rd Most Recent 1 20 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 Functions Key Description SPECIAL FEATURES Page Separation You can copy both left and right pages of an open original book on separate sheets by a single operation on a single page basis Transparency Interleaf You can add copy paper between transparencies when copying on transparencies Set the transparencies in the multifeeder Or you may use a feeder 1 Adding Copy Paper 2 Copying on Copy Paper Transparency Transparency Added copy paper Added copy paper with copied images You can shift the position of the original anywhere for copying For corner shift you may select one from eight directions Center Shift Corner Shift Keypad Shift lay You can lay two images on the same side of a single sheet of copy paper in any of three ways SHEET Making an overlay copy from two one sided ordinals Overlay Making an overlay copy from an open original book Book Overlay A COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON I
62. Toner sensor etecti a a motor FM6 214191 9191 16 9815125 ala o mg ats Set back motor u lt lt lt lt i lt z x z lt lt 185 812 ala ala 511 ERR Fixing assembly Lower feed inlet fan Fixing flm sensor delivery sensor 2 5 Re pick up sensor SL4 2 9 5 8 9 x x 8 ie gt 5 2 44 9 sla 9 up paper alain wlo _ lol_lalal fale 219 a deflecti lenoid o gt ojoj 2 eflecting solenoi TM ola ojc jJo ci Jorz 5150 91615 eje 00000 N 5 ee J60 3 3 3 J63 3 J AR 2 e AE BB e o 5 J36 465 X 55 8 999 psio i Vertical path 2 m 4754 Developing Paper sensor ight doo Multifeeder paper 901 FM4 clutch 8 aniclosed width detecting Primary charging opyboard cover 8 a roller cleanin open closed sensor Multifeeder assembly g Pre registration ultifeeder solenoid paper sensor Laser cooling fan paper sensor 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON General Circuit Diagram 3 4 0 ovo i v h ovo POWER SW CPRST 11111711171177117 STURT PROP PP ETI lt
63. Upper cassette J1606 4 41603 Q1603 4 1 3 1 2 31605 5 U i 01606 MEME 5 i 1 m lt See PA FN SA PA eee oe eae Sere Pa SSL ere EE E EN 1602 Q1605 1 4 1 i Figure 3 604 Sensors on the Cassette Pick Up r Note The sensor Q1603 is not used in the copier s pick up unit 3 82 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Basic Sequence of Operations Cassette 1 A4 2 Copies Continuous Copy start key ON MV INTR SCFW SCFW scr LSTR 5 Cassette 1 pick up solenoid SL2 IN Cassette pick up roller drive motor M4 5 Vertical path roller clutch CL3 Vertical path roller paper sensor PS8 BE 4 Registration roller paper sensor PS5 mw Registration clutch CL1 ma Scanner motor M2 Main motor M1 Figure 3 604 Sequence of Pick UP Operations cassette COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JU
64. blocking plate is present The light blocking plate is absent Display reading 1 1 0 1 0 Tester reading COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON about 0 V 3 255 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gr FhO K PS11 PS12 PS13 Pre re pick up paper sensor PDP5 Duplexing unit inlet paper sensor PDP6 Delivery sensor PDP7 Tester probe J103 2 J105 B2 J105 A2 Service mode DC PCO bitO DC PCO bit1 DC PCO bit2 Make checks nor mal if as indicated Move the sensor flag of PS11 during Move the sensor flag of PS12 during Move the sensor flag of PS13 during standby standby standby The sen sor flag is down the light blocking plate is present The sen sor flag is up the light blocking plate is absent the sen sor flag is down the light blocking plate is present The sen sor flag is up the light blocking plate is absent The sen sor flag is down the light blocking plate is present The sen sor flag is up the light block ing plate is absent Display reading 1 0 1 0 1 0 Tester reading No about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V PS14 Name Horizontal
65. 2 Turning OFF and ON the Primary Charging Roller The primary charging roller is turned ON and OFF by the primary charging roller ON OFF sig nal HVPDO from the DC controller PCB The primary side of the main transformer T101 on the composite power supply PCB oper ates under the control of the CPU Q605 When the HVPDC signal is sent to the composite power supply PCB the CPU Q605 generates the DC control signal PPWM to turn ON the secondary side of T101 thereby applying a DC bias to the primary charging roller Then the CPU generates the AC control sig PAPWM according to the data obtained from serial communications with the DC controller PCB As a result the transformer T300 is driven to apply an AC bias to the primary charging roller COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 3 Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias The output values of the DC bias and the AC bias applied to the primary charging roller are controlled by the DC control signal PDPWM and the AC control signal PAPWM generated by the CPU Q605 These two signals are pulse sig nals In the case of the DC bias the output voltage value is returned to the CPU Q605 to vary the duty ratio of the DC control signal continuously and thereby controlling it to a specific voltage constant voltage control In the case of the AC bias on the other hand the current value of the AC bias output is detect ed and sent to the AC drive circuit The AC drive
66. 2 etsr w3 idWvS 2 61Sr t Utg dl OMS HaMOd 5 6 5 dI CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 24 ww APPENDIX Laser Driver Circuit Diagram 2 2 7V 12 01 504 O J601 201203 0 604 R1229 R1227 01201 01202 0215 70219 eT2TO 1219 Reva SV Sv RGV1 P3 P1 Pe COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 25 APPENDIX G PICK UP UNIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM yostr POSTC sostr vost O EOSIN Og 9 N So91r Os x s n UO 82113 091 70977 habe TOSIN tostr Frogs Ogg 1 480108 01 80 0 8 80 0 10 gostr gostr tostr 095 097 toate 0917 org 7091r eg q toor O og gg z09t0e 209709 209109 09708 09108 0909 08033 9091 42 33 56 lt 9 N gt lt 9 N gt O N 088033 zostr 2091 2091 09718 Y CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME A
67. 2nd side 1st side 2nd side Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 OFF OFF ON OFF CW Delivery roller motor M8 3 609 Paper deflecting plate 1 Registration roller Re pick up roller Set back rollers 1 Flow of copy paper 2 Flow of copy paper Details of the movement of the paper deflecting plate Figure 3 629 3 106 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Sequence of Operations two sided copying When copying on the first side of a two sided copy copy paper is first fed to the delivery assembly after a specific period of time the delivery roller is rotated in reverse to move the paper to the lower feeding assembly The delivery roller is rotated in reverse a specific period of time after the leading edge of copy paper has moved past the delivery sensor Figure 3 630 shows the sequence of operations when making two sided copies Pick up started for 2nd side V SCFW SCRV LSTR SCFW SCRV LSTR Fixing rear paper sensor PS7 Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 Delivery roller motor PS13 5 2 5 Delivery sensor PS13 1 Copy paper is moved to the lower feeding assembly 2 Copy paper is moved to the delivery assembly Figure
68. 4 200 density auto correction and 600PWM density auto cor rection CCD unit Analog processor PCB 4 Shading auto correction 1 Execute shading auto cor rection in service mode 4 Scanning lamp DC controller PCB Standard white plate 4 Factory R amp D shading auto correction 1 Execute factory R amp D shad ing auto correction in ser vice mode 4 Fixing assembly COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 8 FIXER REGST 3 FILM LANK 4 FILM INIT ROTATE CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the fix ing assembly under FIXER REGST and in ser vice mode 3 2 Execute FILM INIT ROTATE 14th page under FUCTION 4 3 243 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gww ssswAO OOO OIOAIAUOV 2 Shading Auto Correction k 3 244 There are two types of shading auto cor rection for servicing and for factory R amp D 8rd screen in 4 n shading auto correction various data items are measured and the results are stored in RAM on the image processor PCB The stored data will be used as tar get value for shading correction executed before copying operation Use this mode for the following When replacing the image processor PCB After executing RAM INIT in service mode 47 Before executing auto density
69. 50000 E tea 4 POWER 5553 6 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON APPENDIX D DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DC Controller Circuit Diagram 1 13 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 7 APPENDIX KGwwsssi ssrr s DC Controller Circuit Diagram 2 13 x d oj xj da co 2 lt 4 q xxx x L S Sl 80 50 50 o N 16 5 1 8PB lt 3 gt cP18 5V CP19 4221 9 D Mx 1 3 0 02 CP1 Q gt 0 lt 7 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON APPENDIX DC Controller Circuit Diagram 3 13 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 9 DC Controller Circuit Diagram 4 13 2 lt 0 Out EB In hei TEE 727 844 2 r 6 uu c _ f iae z eee 2 car 1C107 iius e st Ca PIO Oesh 10 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON
70. Developing clutch CL4 EE i Post fixing sensor PS7 2 Delivery reversing motor M8 m m m rx 2 Delivery sensor PS13 Counter CONT1 1 Counter CONT2 Feeding fan FM1 Exhaust fan FM2 FM3 Laser cooling fan FM4 x w srsWs a s xw Electrical unit fan FMS a NL COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A 1 B SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS 1 Signals 1RPDO UPPER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION 0 signal 1RPD1 UPPER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION 1 signal 2RPDO LOWER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION 0 signal 3RPD1 LOWER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION 1 signal ACON AC DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command APCON AUTO POWER CONTROL ON command ASCNTP ASSIST COUNTER PULSE signal ASRXD ASSIST RECEPTION DATA signal ASTDX ASSIST TRANSMISSION DATA signal BD BEAM DETECT signal BKLTON BACK LIGHT ON signal CBCC COPYBOARD COVER CLOSED signal CCV CONNECT CONTROL CARD CONNECT signal CCV COUNT CONTROL CARD COUNTER PULSE signal CI CALLING INDICATOR signal CL3D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH 3 DRIVE command CL5D ROLLER CLUTCH 5 DRIVE command CNT1D COUNTER DRIVE 1 command CNT2D COUNTER DRIVE 2 command CNT3D COUNTER DRIVE 3 command CS10 D UPPER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 0 CS11 D UPPER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 1 CS12 D UPPER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 2 CS13 D UPPER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal
71. IMPRIME AU JAPON C Pre Exposure step 1 Figure 2 105 Before executing primary charging light from the pre exposure lamp is directed to the surface of the drum pre exposure thereby removing residual charges from the surface and ultimately preventing uneven copy density 2 COPYING PROCESS D Primary Charging step 2 Primary charging roller Figure 2 106 The GP 215 GP200 uses a charging roller made of conducting rubber so as to charge the photosensitive drum directly for primary charging The use of direct charging requires less applica tion voltage than conventional corona charging and produces virtually no ozone An AC bias is applied to stabilize the charges applied to the photosensitive drum The primary charging roller is a special roller and is not the same as the transfer roller COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 3 2 COPYING PROCESS E Laser Exposure step 3 Laser light Figure 2 107 In this step a laser representing the dark areas of the original is directed to the surface of the drum to neutralize the existing charges The areas on the photosensitive drum which have been exposed this way are called light areas and will later attract toner in step 4 development 2 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC F Development step 4 Developing cylinder Figure 2 108 In this step the stat
72. INTR1 STBY INTR2 SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY SLEEP Main motor M1 m 3 Fixing heater H4 LE Scanner motor M2 search n wa Scanner HP sensor PS1 Scanning lamp 1 Shading measurement 1 i Cassette pick up solenoid 512 1 I I Pick up motor M4 zd Vertical path roller clutch Vertical path roller paper sensor PS8 Pre registration paper sensor PS5 wi Registration clutch CL1 Primary charging roller bias DC component EE Primary charging roller bias AC component Transfer charging roller a Separation static eliminator scanner motor N m 97 Laser exposure Developing bias DC component Developing bias AC component Developing clutch CL4 Delivery reversing motor M8 Delivery sensor PS13 Feeding fan 1 T Low Exhaust fan FM2 FM3 High speed _ Low speed I High speed Laser cooling fan Electrical unit fan FM5 Hion speed Figure 3 115 Note 1 A key on the control panel is pressed or an original is placed in the feeder Note 2 Varies according to the time set in user mode quiet mode 3 18 COPYRIGHT 1996 CA
73. N O O N O push switch SW1 push switch SW2 push switch SW3 re circulation sensor S13 upper cover switch MS2 RDF switch MS1 PCB internal signal LED PCB internal signal LED CPB internal signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used pressed pressed pressed paper present closed closed COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC OIT OONN O DDIP SW1 DIP SW2 DIP SW3 DIP SW4 DIP SW5 DIP SW6 DIP SW7 DIP SW8 oL o ol CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 189 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING b Input Output Ports of the ADF 1 2 Address Indication Logic DFP4 PCB internal signal ADF open closed sensor 6 original sensor 1 registration sensor P12 cover open closed sensor PI3 4 delivery sensor 15 ADF closed paper present paper present open paper present O O N O PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal 0 1 2 3 4 5 NO main motor drive A main motor drive A main motor drive B main motor drive B motor current control paper stopper plate solenoid SL1 stamping solenoid SL2 PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB inte
74. Serial communication Control panel Image processor PC CORE IP FAX G3FAX Board Board Mother Telephone board IC564 MASK ROM IC650 DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Memory control Serial communication Composite power supply PCB Lamp regulator circuit DC power supply circuit HVT circuit 15V 24V Scanning lamp Figure 3 102 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 General Block Diagram Image processor CORE IP Board PCB Image processing circuit G3 FAX Board Video processing switching Ratio circuit Memory controller change Laser 7 Telephone line Control panel NCU i Protocol controller PCB c Host computer S SCSI Board option Sorter RDF ADF ASSIST 9 regulator 2 ircuit DC E Ei 2 DC loads Clutch Solenoid Motor Sensor Etc System Scanning lamp Laser scanner motor Mother LAN Network I F Board option 2710 1 Figure 3 103 r Note The CORE IP Board FAX Motherboard and G3 FAX Board come standard with the GP215F
75. Table 3 303 to find out what modes are available in relation to different combinations of the RDF and the duplexing unit Lengthwise ratio Breadthwise ratio 2 on 1 overlay Required Not Required b 2 on 1 continuous Not Required Required a 2 on 1 two sided Required Required 4 on 1 Not Required Not Required Table 3 303 3 38 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 on 1 mode continuous two sided Original A4 x 2 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Copy A4R x 1 Orientation of origi nals on copyboard glass Image after copying arrow indicating feeding direction Remarks Book mode RDF in use Original Two originals are placed on the copy board side by side Copy paper Executed in reduced copying only May be executed for two sided copying Uses the RDF s reversing function when feeding originals thereby changing the order of the originals making it 2 1 instead of normal 1 2 ADF in use 2 on1 overlay Original A Two originals are placed on the copy board side by side Copy paper Executed in reduced copying only May be executed for two sided copying Since the ADF does not have an original reversing function the order of originals cannot be changed As such th
76. User Mode Auto Sort You can opt for automatic switching to sort mode when an original is placed in the RDF This is effective when the Multi Tray 12 and an RDF are installed Face Down Output You can opt for reversed delivery of copies so that the backs of the copies are upward Projector You can opt for displaying the Projector key as part of extension mode Photo Mode You can select the use of photo mode When ON is selected the Photo key will be displayed on the Copier Basic screen Standard Key 1 2 setting You can select up to two Preference keys from among the extension mode keys for display on the Copier Basic screen Custom Setting Initialize You can initialize the copier specifications settings to factory defaults Standard settings You can store initialize the combination of copying modes in response to power on or a press on the Reset key Store Init 1 24 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION E Common Settings Under custom common settings you can manage functions available to the user copier fax functions etc or execute adjustment and cleaning modes Start user mode for custom common settings 1 Custom Common Settings Item Description Factory settings INITIAL FUNCTION Use it to select initial functions i e copier or fax functions in response to power on Cop
77. Uses the RDF s reversing function when feeding originals thereby chang ing the order of the originals 2nd Original making it 4 3 2 instead of copying 4 normal 3 4 1 2 ADF in use 1st Original Combines the following copying Reduced copying Image shifting Overlay copying Since the ADF does not have an origi nal reversing function the order of orig inals cannot be changed 2nd Original As such the orientation of the originals copying on the ADF s original tray is reversed lt instead of normal lt v Figure 3 315 4 on 1 Mode 3 40 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND d Enlarged Image Composition In enlarged image composition the reduced image of an original is returned to its original size it may be any of the following four 2 on 1 generating 2 outputs 2 on 1 two sided generating 4 outputs 4 on 1 generating 4 outputs 4 on 1 two sided generating 8 outputs D 2 on 1 Generating 2 Outputs Original Outputs A l 1 2 1 p Original Outputs i 2 2 2 on 1 The image original width of continuous 2 on 1 is divided vertically for output The image original length of continuous 2 on 1 is divi
78. and step by step instructions on how to operate the copier CHAPTER 2 Copying Processes shows how the GP215 GP200 generates copies while discussing each of the steps involved CHAPTER 3 Operations and Timing explains the GP215 GP200 s mechanical system by function and principles behind its electrical systems in relation to timing of each operation CHAPTER 4 Mechanical System explains how to disassemble assemble and adjust the GP215 GP200 CHAPTER 5 Installation provides points to note when selecting the site of installation and instruc tions on how to install the GP215 GP200 CHAPTER 6 Maintenance and Inspection provides tables of periodically replaced parts and con sumables durables as well as a scheduled servicing chart APPENDIX contains a general timing chart general circuit diagrams and PCB diagrams This Service Manual is accompanied by the Service Handbook which contains information on how to maintain and inspect the GP215 GP200 through adjustment and troubleshooting work Information found in this manual may be updated from time to time for product improvement and major updates are communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins All service persons are expected to be thoroughly familiar with the contents of this Service Manual the Service Handbook and Service Information bulletins and be ready to respond to the needs of the user promptly COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP2
79. be sure to exposed enter the value recorded on the service label PRI DC Indicates the primary charging DC out no IMG put between sheets DVLP DC Indicates the developing DC output IMG while an image is exposed DVLP DC Indicates the developing DC output 0 65535 IMG between sheets TRNS Indicates the transfer charging DC out IMG put while an image is exposed TRNS Indicates the transfer charging DC out no IMG put between sheets PRI AC Indicates the primary charging AC out IMG put while an image is exposed PRI AC Indicates the primary charging AC out no IMG put between sheets 3 198 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 Back Up Data for the Composite Power Supply PCB Item 8 ADJUST 03 AGS GAIN AGS OFST PRI DC OFST PRI AC OFST1 PRI AC OFST2 TRNS OFFST FL OFST DEV DC OFST lt lt lt XXXXX lt lt lt qq bb JL Description Label Remarks 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Settings AGS GAIN AGS OFST PRI DC OFST PRI AC OFST1 PRI AC OFST2 TRSN OFFST FL OFST DEV DC OFST Indicate APVC gain Indicates APVC offset Indicates primary charging DC offset Indicate primary charging AC offset 1 Indicat
80. drive and friction parts COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Silicone oil CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Tool No CK 0551 20g Prepared by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT 1 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV CANON INC Printed in Japan REVISION 0 JULY 1996 26313 30809 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 Japan Canon This publication is printed on 7096 reprocessed paper PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 0796 2 82 1
81. is selected In sharpness mode strong the variations in the density of an image are emphasized to generate a crisp image Black 255 2001 qd 100 Main scanning direction White 0 VAN output ad Figure 3 328a Black 255 Black 255 200 200 100 100 Main scanning direction Main scanning direction White 0 output di White 0 UU cuit gt Figure 3 328b Sharpness Mode Weak Figure 3 328c Sharpness Mode Strong COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 45 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING b Al Outline processing Al outline processing emphasizes the edges of characters When image data input is as shown in Figure 3 329 the CPU assumes the presence of charac ters and initiates outline processing Black 255 200 100 Main scanning direction White 0 gt Figure 3 329 Image Data of Characters Black 255 200 100 Main scanning direction White 0 Figure 3 330 Image Data of Characters after Outline Processing 3 46 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC When image data input is as shown in Figure 3 331 the CPU assumes the presence of a photo and does not initiate outline processing Black 255 200 100 Main scanning direction White 0 Figure 3 331 Image Data of a Photo CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww ssri 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 Ne
82. normally Turns on the Manual Staple key Indicates a message on the copier s control panel if stapler sorter mode is selected in this condition Remove all paper stack COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC The stapler has run out of staples Prohibits sta pling Indicates the Add Staple mes sage CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Replace the sta ple cartridge 3 171 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Version Indication 1 5th screen 1 DISPLAY 04 IP 22 DCON 22 Guide to Version Numbers DF 27 xxxx type of software SORT 22 yy version number PANEL 22 22 R amp D control number LANG 22 POWER CPU xxxx yy zz bb C Indicates the version number of the ROM DIMM on the image processor PCB Indicates the version number of the EPROM IC103 IC104 on the DC controller PCB Indicates the version number of the ROM on the feeder ADF RDF controller Indicates the version number of the ROM on the sorter controller PCB Indicates the version number of the ROM on the CPU PCB of the control panel Indicates a specific language COMMON FINNISH JAPANESE ITALIAN ENGLISH NORWEGIAN FRENCH PORTUGUESE GERMAN SPANISH DANISH SWEDISH DUTCH POWER C Indicates the version number of the CPU on the composite power
83. pli Return to Setting the Board and perform the GLGL appropriate steps once again U SMALL US KLGL To set the Interface Board B1 Interface STMT OFFICIO Board A1 or communication Control Board U LARGE UL EOFFICIO A1 as an option see the Installation Proce E ROFFICIO dure of the respective board ww 11 4 Press the switch SW2 LDR 11X7 ALTR 4 Press the switch SW ALGL LED1 LED2 LED3 sw2 COMPUTER ee e U SMALL 2 LED4 LED5 LED6 Table 5 506 JA1 JB2 E us 11 Check the DIP switch settings JB1 11 1 Shift bit 3 of the DIP switch SW5 on the 5 Copy Data Controller A1 to OFF PNE 11 2 Press the2 key so that the setting of the DIP switch SW1 SW5 on the Copy Data Controller A1 appears Figure 5 519 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 41 5 INSTALLATION 11 5 Check to make sure that the notation of the Keypad A1 is as follows and disconnect the Keypad A1 Figure 5 520 12 Attach the switch settings label to the upper cover 5 then record the setting of each switch on the label Figure 5 521 13 Fix the upper cover in place using two screws 7 When doing so make sure that the cable of the power supply unit is held in position on the cable guide inside the unit and it is not trapped by the upper cover 14 To connect the Control Card Printer A 1 con nect it to the connector J4 of the Copy Data Co
84. settings 1 Network configuration Options used by the user YES YES Does LED1 turn OFF in about 20 sec YES Is the test print image Are all test print normal p images normal Re connect the CORE IP Board FAX Motherboard and FAX Board Suspect a fault in the image as formation system including the image processor PCB Make a correction according Execute FAX test printing to the appropriate trial shot instructions in the Service VIDEO TEST Re install the NIB and the Protocol Controller PCB Then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch while paying attention to LED1 leftmost on the NIB NO image at 400 dpi and the image with the REFINE Suspect a fault on the CIST Make a correction Board Disconnect and connect the y CIST Board and execute test printing 600 300 dpi which is subject to REFINE processing If the problem is not corrected replace the CIST Board Try replacing the FAX Mone ad ARD iha Re install the FAX Motherboard CORE IP Board Suspect a fault on the host i e Replace the NIB Does LED1 turn OFF within about 20 sec Suspect a fault in the reading YES System mirror lens CCD analog processor PCB etc Make a correction according to the appropriate instructions in the Service Manual Is the test print image normal
85. trial shot VIDEO TEST YES Is the test print image normal NO Re connect the CORE IP Board FAX Motherboard and FAX Board Execute FAX test printing trial shot VIDEO TEST YES Is the test print image normal NO Try replacing the FAC Motherboard and the Board which affect printer images Suspect a fault in the party or the line COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 11 Test Printing Image Processor PCB Test Printing FAX Board Test Printing Printer Board Font List 600 300 dpi Analog Image processor PCB CORE IP Board FAX Board Analog Image processor PCB CORE IP Board FAX Board Analog processor processor processor PCB PCB PCB Image Rotation Image M Rota ion CCD processor coding Memory CCD processor Grocoseirig coding lt Memory CCD PCB Ratio decoding PCB Image processor PCB CORE IP Board FAX Board Image E Rotation inary i decodi processor processing d UE Memory Ratio ecoging PCB g resolution resolution Conversion conversion Protocol Protocol Controller Controller Laser Laser driver driver Ratio resolution conversion Protocol Controller
86. 1 Original change inthe detection 2 in the level level Figure 3 208 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 27 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Detecting the Size of Originals Using the combination of the outputs of the sensors representing the presence absence of an original the image processor PCB identifies the size of the original as shown in Tables 3 206 through 208 Same Indicates that there is no change in the sensor output i e the presence of an original is assumed The sensor output is checked every 128 ms after the copyboard cover has turned ON Different Indicates that there is a change in the sensor output 1 the absence of an original is assumed The sensor output is checked every 128 ms after the copyboard cover has turned ON Original size sensor 0 1 2 3 Same Same Same Same Different Same Same Same Different Different Same Same Different Different Different Different Different Same Different Different Different Different Same Same Different Same Different Different Table 3 201 AB configured original Original size sensor 0 2 11517 Same Same LGL Different Same LTR R Different Different Different Different Table 3 202 Inch configured original Size 3 28 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 Identifying the Size of Origi
87. 200 MIN PWM 200 MAX COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Use it to enter laser basic values Label on the image processor PCB Enter under PWM600MIN Enter under PWM600MAX Enter under PWM20MIN Enter under 200 0 65535 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON If you have initial ized the RAM or replaced the image processor PCB enter the value recorded on the label attached to the image processor PCB 3 203 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 Adjusting the AE Fixing Assembly Settings Item 8 ADJUST 06 AE SLOP XXXXX lt FIXER RESIST lt FILM ALNK 1 XXXXX lt ABC TBL XXXXX lt STRD ADJ XXXXX lt Ct JU Description Settings Remarks AE SLOP When copying in AE mode with priority on image quality some types of originals gen erate light images If such is the case use this mode to adjust the copy image density 119 Service handbook p 2 21 FIXER RESIST Use it to enter the resistance of the fixing assembly f you have replaced the fixing assembly enter the value recorded on the label attached to the fixing assembly Resistance to enter Label FILM LANK 3 204 Use it to enter the film thickness rank fixing temperature control value f you have replaced the fixing assembly enter the value recorded on the label attached t
88. 21st to 30th copy 195 For instance if fixing faults occur with 2 31st to 40th copy 190 selected change it to 1 or O Try 1 first and 41stto 50th copy 185 then try 0 if necessary 51st to 100th copy gt 180 If offset occurs with 2 selected change it to E Control 3 if offset continues change it to 4 1st to 30th copy 19590 316110 40th 190 41stto 50th 185 C 51stto 100th copy gt 180 3 120 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Controlling the Supply Power to the Fixing Heater The temperature of the fixing heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied to the fixing heater The plane shaped heater used for the fixing heater tends to be subject to variation because of pro duction factors In view of this you must enter the resistance in service mode 3 whenever you have replaced the fix ing assembly so that the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB executes appropriate power control Caution The fixing heater resistance is entered in service mode at the factory do not change it unless you have replaced the fixing assembly The power to the fixing heater is controlled by means of phase power control The microprocessor controls the output timing of the fixing heater drive signal HTRD so that power appropriate to the target temperature of the fixing heater
89. 3 CS14 D UPPER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 4 CS20 D LOWER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 0 CS21 D LOWER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 1 CS22 D LOWER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 2 CS23 D LOWER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 3 CS24 D LOWER CASETTE SIZE DETECTION signal 4 DCH DC DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command DCON DC DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command DFLD DELIVERY DEFLECTION SOLENOID DRIVE signal DSZ1 DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION signal 1 DSZ2 DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION signal 2 DSZ3 DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION signal 3 0574 DOCUMENT SIZE DETECTION signal 4 DVCD DEVELOPING CLUTCH DRIVE signal FFD FIXING FILM DETECTION command FL S FLUORESCENT LAMP INTENSITY signal FLPRTH FLUORESCENT LAMP PRE THERMISTOR signal FLPWM FLUORESCENT LAMP PWM DRIVE command FLTH FLUORESCENT LAMP THERMISTOR signal 1 FAN1 FM1 DRIVE command FMD 2 EXHAUST 2 FM2 DRIVE command FMD 3 EXHAUST FAN3 FM3 DRIVE command FMD 4 DRIVE command FMD 5 FAN5 FM5 DRIVE command FMD 6 FAN6 FM6 DRIVE command 2 FS HTNG HTRD HVTMO HVTM1 LCSPD LED ON LMD LOCK LOW DETECT LSRD MFCK MFPD MFPW MMCK MMD MRSD PCSD PDP1 PDP3 PDP4 PDP5 PDP6 PDP7 PEXP RDOD RFLD RGCD RTEMP SCHP SEBON SH SL2D SRGPD SW ON SWO swt TEP TH1 TH2 UCSPD UP DETECT VPPD WTDT FS signal HEATER NG signal HEATER DRIVE command HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER MODE 0 HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER MODE 1 LOWER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION signal PILOT LED DRIVE command LAZER SCAN
90. 604 2 Remove the two screws and remove the blade mount 4 Figure 4 605 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 33 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM VII FIXING SYSTEM 5 Slide the separation claw as shown and remove it starting with the side without a boss A Fixing Assembly 1 Separation Claw 1 Open the delivery door 2 Remove the screw 3 and remove the grip 2 of the separation claw unit 3 Remove the separation claw by sliding it to the right Figure 4 703 2 Removing the Fixing Unit 1 Open the delivery door 2 Remove the screw and remove the fixing assembly inside cover 1 Figure 4 701 4 Turn the separation claw so that the boss 5 matches the bushing 6 Figure 4 704 Figure 4 702 4 34 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Disconnect the four connectors 2 remove 4 Removing the Cleaning Roller the screw 3 and remove the grounding 1 Slide out the fixing unit screw 4 then slide out the fixing unit 2 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the cleaning roller 2
91. C Using Adjustment Mode and Settings Mode 3 160 D 1 DISPALY control display mode 3 161 E 2 VO DISPLAY I O display mode 3 178 F 3 ADJUST adjustment mode 3 197 G 4 FUNCTION function mode 3 208 H 5 OPTIN settings 3 228 1 6 COUNTER counter mode 3 234 7 ACC accessory mode 3 238 K Electrical System 3 242 SELF DIAGNOSIS 3 261 A 3 261 B Self Diagnosis of the RDF G1 3 266 C Self Diagnosis of the ADF F1 3 266 D Self Diagnosis of the Pedestal 3 267 E Self Diagnosis of the Multi Output Tray C1 3 267 F Self Diagnosis of the Multi Output 12 3 268 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING I BASIC OPERATION A Functional Construction The GP215 GP200 can be divided into seven functional blocks pick up feeding system original expo sure system image processing system laser exposure system image formation system communication system and control system Original exposure system Optical path Original illumination Control system Image processing system gt Analog processor Image processor DC controller Control panel Image
92. CHAPTER 2 COPYING PROCESS IMAGE FORMATION 2 1 F Development step 4 2 4 A Outline ete 2 1 Transfer step 5 2 5 B Latent Image Formation Block 2 2 H Separation step 6 2 6 C Pre Exposure step 1 2 3 l Fixing SOP 7 2 7 D Primary Charging step 2 2 3 Dram Cleaning 2 7 E Laser Exposure step 3 2 4 AUXILIARY PROCESS 2 8 CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING BASIC OPERATION 3 1 C Controlling the A Functional Construction 3 1 Transfer Charging Roller Bias 3 63 B Outline of the Electrical Circuitry 3 2 D Controlling the Developing Bias 3 66 C Inputs to the Major PCBS 3 6 E Controlling the D Main Motor Control PCB 3 16 Separation Static Eliminator Bias 3 68 Il ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 20 F Controlling the A 3 20 Transfer Guide Fixing Roller Bias 3 69 B Varying the Reproduction Ratio 3 22 G Developing Assembly Drum Cleaner 3 70 C Sequence of Operations H Primary Charging Roller original exposure system 3 22 Cleaning Mechanism 3 73 D Scanner 3 23
93. CST U1 ON OFF of notation of U size cassette paper size If the machine is equipped with fax functions go to H Fax Settings Otherwise go to Checking Copy Images 5 18 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION H Fax Settings for machines equipped with fax functions 1 Executing All Clear Work Remarks Press Cancel so that the Service Mode Menu screen will appear Press FAX 8 to highlight then press the OK key Press 8 CLEAR to highlight then press the OK key Press ALL on the screen to high light then press the OK key Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Connecting to the Telephone Line for machines equipped with fax functions Work Remarks Connect the modular cord to the The topmost modular jack is for a telephone line line modular jack found at the rear of the machine Connect the other end of the modular cord to the modular jack of the telephone line COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 19 5 INSTALLATION Kw 3 Setting the Dialing Type for model with FAX function only Work Remarks Turn ON the main power switch Press the User Mode key and press FAX spec settings on the screen that has appeared Press B
94. Control 1 Fix the Control Card in place on the control Card V while paying attention to avoid trap panel using four screws 2 ping the wires 3 Install the control panel to the copier 4 Install the fixing controller 5 At this time be sure to fix the grounding wire 6 of the Control Card V in place by tightening the screw Figure 5 403 r Note 1 Try sliding in and out a card and fix the Figure 5 405 Control Card V in place where card may be moved smoothly 5 Cut the harness band 7 shown and discon nect the shorting connector 8 Note 2 Check to make sure that the connector 3 for the printer is centered over the hole coor rt c t Figure 5 406 Figure 5 404 5 32 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION 6 Lead the 4P connector 9 of the copier 9 Remove the protection sheet from the control through the edge saddle of the control panel panel guide plate of the Control Card V side plate 10 Attach the control panel guide plate 43 on the 7 Connect the connector 47 of the Control copier s control panel Card V and the connector Figure 5 409 11 Attach the memory record sheet and the transparent
95. D 1 DISPALY control display mode 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Use this mode to display the settings controlled by the CPU or the nature of control You cannot change the displayed values or settings Each press on the D key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen Apress on the key will bring up the Menu screen 1 Temperature Indication 1st screen Item 1 DISPLAY 01 DRAM TH xxxx C MAIN THzxxxx C SUB THzxxxx C Description Remarks DRAM TH MAIN TH Indicates the temperature around the photosensitive drum Indicates the temperature at the middle of the fixing assembly output of thermistor TH1 Unit C SUB TH COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Indicates the temperature at the end of the fixing assembly out put of thermistor TH2 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 161 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Jam History 1 2nd screen Use this mode to display a history of jams jam data covering the most recent 40 jams in reversed order of occurrence 1 DISPLAY 02 AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHH
96. D Conversion Circuit ABC Circuit a A D Conversion Circuit The A D conversion circuit converts analog signals from the CCD to 8 bit digital image signals In general the A D conversion signal performs A D conversion based on the reference voltage As such increasing decreasing the reference voltage will increase decrease the dynamic range difference between maximum output level and minimum output level affecting the signal level after A D conversion This means faithful digital conversion of analog inputs is not possible The ABC circuit to be explained next takes advantage of this fact i e the reference voltage is varied according to the A D conversion circuit output signal level to vary the dynamic range thereby canceling the background density of originals This processing is executed for every main scanning line Outline of A D conversion White original Colored original The ABC circuit Surface of varies the reference j m NEM voltage to lower the anoriginal FFH white level E i thereby decreasing ME the dynamic range white Output level 00H black A Dynamic range of a white original Dynamic range of a colored background Figure 3 303 b ABC auto background control Circuit The ABC circuit operates if priority to speed is selected as part of AE auto density mechanism set tings image signals after A D co
97. GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 18 Printing the Parameters 4 FUNCTION 18 PRM PRINT OK START Ct Item Description Reference page Use it to print out the contents 1 Press PRM PRINT to highlight then press the of service mode 3 5 and OK key 6 however the machine must 3 ADJUST be installed with a FAX Board b OPTION 6 COUNTER The machine must be equipped with fax functions COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 227 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING H 5 OPTION settings mode Use this mode to set change various machine settings specifications Each press on the key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen Press the desired item notation on the screen to highlight Use the keypad to enter numbers Apress on the key will permanently store the entered value When done be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch 1 Setting the Copy Count and Shut Off Slant Mode 5 OPTION 1 COPY LIM 100 100 lt 000 SHUT OFF OFF 1 0 0 IM ANGLE COIN OPERT DRM MSG Ct JU Function Description COPY LIM Use it to change the upper You may change the upper limit imposed on limit imposed on the copy the copy count between 1 an
98. I 1 4 1C1010 IC1008 IC1008 1009 A 20 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Analog Processor Circuit Diagram 2 4 12V 01005 IC1001 e 8 o COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 001 0 J amp e M 3 o 6019 SASY eoorr 80019 0 6001004 12026 7 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON C1020 C10 SV 45V 5v 5 5V 800 21 5 Pa APPENDIX 5204 x Sa 38 20 NNNM 25058 321123 lt O IC4005 P1002 5 60018 SHG J1001 21 APPENDIX Analog Processor Circuit Diagram 3 4 92019 570 01 1 z 015 2 o o AG NE u E 02014 5 orotaz 990794 2 5 5 o 24 Ag lt gt boo a 412 5 24 O 25 11 T EE oe 2 O U ERE 270701 42 A 3n AE 82015 ero UL NER IET 9 d VLSOHA pm n sete P on 4 200121 o o B ecoty AaNYOSSHd CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1
99. IV PICK UP ASSEMBLY 4 18 C Replacing the ROM DIMM A Pick Up Assembly 4 18 image processor 4 38 B Multifeeder Assembly 4 20 CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION SELECTING THE SITE 5 1 G Machine Specifications Il UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 3 Setting Mode 5 5 18 A Unpackin0 u 5 4 H Fax Settings for machines equipped B Supplying 5 6 with fax functions 5 19 C Stirring the 5 8 1 Checking the Copy Images 5 24 D Installing the Drum Cartridge 5 10 RELOCATING THE MACHINE 5 30 E Installing the Cassettes 5 14 IV INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V 5 31 Installing the Feeder 5 16 V COPY DATA 1 5 34 CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 6 1 SCHECULED SERVICING CHART 6 2 Il CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES 6 1 IV SCHEDULED SERVICING 6 4 iv COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON APPENDIX om COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC GENERAL TIMING CHART A 1 SIGNALS AND ABBREVIA
100. Item Description 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION rr Factory settings STORE SPECIAL CASSETTE Use it to select and register the paper appropriate paper sizes and the paper icons for colored paper and recycled paper 2 each of AB and Inch configurations default sizes only You may select up to 16 paper icons SPC1 A4 SPC2 A4 SPC3 LTR SPC4 LTR SET ENVELOPE CASSETTE Use it to register the cassette for envelopes and the type of envelope As many as six envelope types and two cas sette types may be registered ENV1 No 4 ENV2 COM10 STACK BYPASS SIZE ENTRY Use it to specify whether to display the screen for manual feed paper size selection automatically when copy paper is set in the multifeeder assembly ON To display the size selection screen OFF To not to display the size selection Screen Use it to specify the use of the Multi Tray 3 12 s special tray With Multi Tray 3 Installed A Copier B Fax printer C With Multi tray 12 Installed A B Fax Printer PRINTING PRIORITY Use it to specify printing priority for copier fax and printer functions Copier 1 Fax 2 Printer 3 SET SYSTEM SETTINGS PASS WORD Use it to set the ID number for the System Administrator As specified by the user 4 digit num ber RESTRICT USE OF FAX WITH CONTROL CARD Use it to specify whether to limit the individ uals permitted to use the fax functions by mean
101. Multifeeder paper sensor MFPD Pre registration paper sensor PDP1 Fixing assembly delivery paper sen sor PDP3 Tester probe J113 A11 J113 A5 J109 6 Service mode DC PAO bit2 DC PAO bit3 DC PAO bit5 Make checks nor mal if as indicated Place paper on the paper tray of the multifeeder during standby Open the right door during standby and put copy paper over the pre registration paper sensor Put copy paper over the delivery paper sensor during stand by Paper is not placed Paper is placed Copy paper is not put over the sensor Copy paper is put over the sen SOr Copy paper is not put over the sensor Copy paper is put over the sen SOr Display reading 1 0 1 0 1 0 Tester reading about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V PS8 PS9 PS10 Vertical path paper sensor PDP4 Right door open closed sensor RDOP Waste toner sensor STDT Tester probe Service mode J113 A2 DC PAO bit9 J113 A8 DC PAO bit10 J113 B6 DC PAO bit11 Make checks nor mal if as indicated Move up the sensor lever of PS8 during standby Open the right door during standby Move the sensor lever during standby The lever is moved up The lever is returned The right door is closed The right door is opened The light
102. Negative 4 x 5 Negative 4 x 5 Positive COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 23 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Key Description Special Features Separation image You can divide a single original into several parts for enlargement and copy ing on one side of several copies 1 on 2 One Sided to 51 1 on 2 One Sided 1 on 2 One Sided One Sided Io one viden to One Sided 1 on 4 One Sided to Sided E 1 on 4 One Sided 1 on 2 Two Sided to to One Sided One Sided 1 on 4 Two Sided to A 1 on 2 Two Sided One Sided to One Sided to One Sided 1 on 4 Two Sided 1 on 4 Two Sided to One Sided to One Sided Memory You can store as many as five combinations of any copying modes In addi tion you may store the name of each mode key M1 through M5 You can recall a copying mode which has been stored previously for use as many as three modes may be recalled Most Recent 2nd Most Recent 3rd Most Recent
103. P ep m SERVICE MANUAL REVISION 0 Canon JULY 1996 FY8 13EE 000 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APAN IMPRIME AU JAPON IMPORTANT THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC JAPAN AND IS FOR REFERENCE USE ONLY SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Printed in Japan Imprim au Japon Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information Prepared by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 Japan COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON INTRODUCTION This Service Manual provides basic facts and figures needed to service the GP215 GP200 in the field The GP215 GP200 is designed to accommodate fax and printer functions in addition to copier functions and separate service manuals are available for each function refer to the appropriate service manual as necessary This Service Manual is organized as follows CHAPTER 1 General Introduction shows the GP215 GP200 s features specifications
104. PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 59 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING B Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias 1 Outline The bias for the primary charging roller is controlled by the composite power supply PCB according to the instructions from the DC controller PCB In addition an AC bias is applied to the primary charging roller to ensure stable charging The composite power supply PCB serves the following functions Controlling the DC bias to a specific voltage Controlling the AC bias to a specific current Primary charging assembly Composite power supply PCB Photo sensitive drum Rectification AC component m current detection T101 Drum ambient temperature detection S AC drive circuit DC 1 current Frequency setection S L division S 5 s g 5 5 t 5 5 9 8 og g o 848 888 8 t c o c 8 9 818 2658 x olol 5128 OQ v S a Oy lt Q605 5 J209 B2 S J209 M A9 5 5 5S 8 S 55 E So gt gt ge Gc O a amp 02 89 1 J102 A1 A7 10101 CPU DC controller PCB Figure 3 503 3 60 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
105. SCFW SCR LSTR Delivery papper deflecting plate 2 solenoid SL7 Lower feeding assembly inlet sensor jam check Duplexing inlet sensor PS15 Main motor M1 Normal Error Figure 3 663 Sequence for Lower Feeding Assembly Inlet Delay Jams overlay copying Jam message SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR Y 5 Fixing rear paper sensor PS7 Delivery paper deflecting plate 2 solenoid SL5 Delivery sensor PS13 Delivery roller motor M8 Lower feeding assembly CW CCW inlet sensor jam check Lower feeding assembly inlet sensor PS12 Main motor M1 Normal 1 Error Figure 3 664 Sequence for Lower Feeding Assembly Inlet Delay Jams two sided copying 3 136 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND i Duplexing Assembly Re Pick Up Sensor Delay Jam A delay jam will be identified if copy paper does not reach the re pick up sensor PS1 1 within spe cific period of time after it has moved past the lower feeding assembly inlet sensor PS12 SCRV LSTR 6 Lower feeding inlet sensor PS12 Re pick up paper sensor jam check Re pick up sensor PS11 Normal G Main motor M1 O Figure 3 665
106. SYSTEM KG n VI DEVELOPING SYSTEM A Developing Assembly 1 Removing the Developing Assembly 1 Open the front door 2 Shift the developing assembly releasing lever D and remove the screw then remove the developing assembly stopper 2 Figure 4 601 3 Holding the grip of the developing assembly slide out the developing assembly to the front while supporting its bottom Caution 1 Do not hold the developing assembly as if to sandwich the developing cylinder oth erwise such can encourage caking of the toner 2 After installing the developing assembly be sure to install the developing assembly stopper 3 The gap between the cylinder and the blade is adjusted at the factory to high precision Do not try to adjust it in the field 4 32 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 Removing the Toner Sensor 1 Slide out the developing unit 2 Remove the screw 2 and disengage the hook G then remove the grip D of the devel oping assembly Figure 4 602 3 Remove the two screws 1 and disconnect the connector then remove the toner sensor Figure 4 603 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 Blade Mount 1 Remove the two screws 2 and disengage the four hooks 3 then remove the developing assembly cover 1 Figure 4
107. Sequence for Re Pick Up Delay Jams normal Jam message Y SCRV LSTR 5 Lower feeding assembly inlet sensor PS12 Re pick up paper sensor jam check t Re pick up sensor Normal PS11 4 Main motor M1 Y 5 Figure 3 666 Sequence for Re Pick Up Delay Jams error COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 137 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Jam History The machine retains a history of jams which have occurred inside the machine You may check the his tory in service mode In memory are The remaining number of copies and The effective copying mode Using the memory the copier will operate using the effective copying mode and make the remaining number of copies once the jam has been removed Reference If the message Return Original and Press Start appears on the control panel after removing the jam put the original back into the feeder as they were set initially 3 138 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND VII FANS A Functions and Operations 1 Outline As many as five fans are used in the machine for such functions as are shown in Table 3 701 Figure 3 701 shows the arrangement of the fan and Figure 3 702 shows the timing of operation Name Orientation Function
108. a single sheet of paper The rotation of the cam 1 raises the pick up roller shaft Roller holder Pick up roller shaft Figure 3 612 Arrangement of the Pick Up Roller Feeding roller Feeding roller shaft Pick up roller shaft Pick up roller Roller holder Pick up lever The cam 1 rotates when SL2 turns ON Cam 1 Pick up solenoid SL2 Figure 3 613 Up Down Movement of the Pick Up Roller Shaft COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 89 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING d Detecting the Absence of Paper inside the Cassette When the cassette runs out of copy paper the paper detecting lever falls through the detecting slit in the cassette The paper detecting lever operates in conjunction with the light blocking plate so that the light blocking plate blocks the respective photointerrupter Q1604 for the upper cassette Q1605 for the lower cassette thereby indicating the absence of paper inside the cassette Figure 3 614 shows the state in which the cassette has run out of copy paper Q1604 Upper cassette Q1605 Lower cassette Paper detecting lever Figure 3 614 Arrangement of the Paper Detecting Lever 3 90 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING C Non Pick Up Operation standby The machine operates as follows when the cassette is slid into
109. a switch to power saving mode is not allowed if the Printer Board is installed or a FAX function is set to start at a spe cific time b Quick Start Mode SLEEP 1 In quick start mode the image processor PCB and the DC controller PCB white areas in Figure 3 802 are supplied with power In this mode FAX and printer functions are enabled 3 141 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Outline of Power Supply in Standby Main power switch switch Front door AC Composite power supply PCB Lamp regulator 7 power Supply CI incoming signal DC power supply Printer Board Network I F Board System Motherboard supply circuit 15 power Supply 12V power Supply DC 15V DC 5V Image Laser driver PCB DC 7V DC 12V FAX Motherboard processor PCB 45V power supply Analog processor PCB DC 15V lt DC 12V supply Laser scanner motor driver PCB Control panel DC 24Vu Control panel power supply switch Control panel power switch ON signal Main motor driver PCB Multi Output Tray B2 RF DC 24VR DC controller PCB DC 24Vu DC 24VR DC 15V DC 12V DC 5V DC loads ADF Multi Output Tray C1
110. and remove the rear cover Remove the scanner cooling fan Remove the three screws and remove the fly wheel Remove the cable guide by disengaging the hook assembly Remove the two screws 2 and remove the scanner cooing fan duct 1 D by sliding it to the left Figure 4 512 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit Remove the rear cover and remove the scan ner cooling fan duct Remove the copyboard glass CCD unit cover IP cover and IP PCB Remove the fan duct 2 1 by sliding it to the rear CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON I 2 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Removing the BD PCB 4 Remove the cable guide 2 and the hook assembly 3 by disengaging them 1 Remove the laser scanner unit 2 Remove the two M2 screws and remove the BD PCB 1 U WI Figure 4 515 Figure 4 513 5 Remove the cable 4 and five screws 5 and 4 Laser Driver Unit disconnect the connector 6 then remove the 1 Remove the laser scanner unit laser scanner unit 7 2 Remove the two screws 2 and remove the laser driver unit Figure 4 516 Figure 4 514 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 31 4 MECHANICAL
111. circuit uses the reference signal AC control signal PAPWM and the AC bias cur rent value it has received to generate signals to drive the transformer T300 thereby controlling the AC bias to a constant current CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 61 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gw r 4 Correcting the Drum Surface Potential The drum surface potential fluctuating in rela tion to changes in the machine internal tempera ture is corrected by varying the primary charging roller bias voltage The machine internal temper ature is detected by the thermistor mounted to the rear plate of the machine and the data is sent to the CPU on the DC controller PCB The CPU n the DC controller PCB subjects the data to computation and the results are sent to the composite power supply PCB in serial com munication mode The composite power supply PCB in response uses the data to determine the primary charging roller bias DC value 3 62 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 5 Resistance of the Photosensitive Drum The photosensitive drum can be thought of as a type of resistor The resistance of the photosen sitive drum tends to decrease because of changes over time To measure the resistance the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged to an even poten tial at a specific voltage DC AC The CPU on the composite power supply PCB samples the current of the charges being applied to find out the resis
112. delivery assembly to the right and disengage its left and then its right to remove COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 25 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Installing and Positioning the Paper Deflecting Plate 1 Solenoid SL5 1 Remove the delivery assembly 2 Place the delivery assembly upright on a level surface desk 3 Pushin the steel core of the paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 until it stops 4 Loosen the adjusting screw to adjust so that the gap between the steel core E ring and the solenoid frame is about 0 2 mm 5 Install the delivery assembly to end the adjustment Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid Figure 4 426 4 26 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON V EXPOSURE A Illuminating Assembly 1 Removing the Scanning Lamp r Caution 1 Wait until the surface of the scanning lamp has cooled before starting the work 2 Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp in particular on the transparent side 3 If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled dry wipe it 1 Disconnect the power plug 2 Remove the copyboard glass E EXE o JE Figure 4 501 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 3 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM Remov
113. detection mechanism is used for sheets picked from the lower feeding assembly The rear front registration detecting assembly is located near the vertical path roller assembly and con sists of the horizontal registration sensor PS14 and the horizontal registration motor M9 The horizontal registration motor M9 is used to drive the horizontal registration sensor PS14 the movement of the horizontal registration sensor is used to detect the edge of paper and the result is used to determine the position of laser exposure M9 Copy paper Detection start position d Home position Figure 3 634 3 114 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ee 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING b Operations The home position of the horizontal registration sensor PS14 is checked when 24 VDC is supplied i e when the front cover is closed after power on and the movement is started when paper is stacked in the lower feeding assembly at detection start position When the copy paper picked up from the lower feeding assembly reaches the vertical path paper sen sor PS8 the horizontal registration motor M9 turns ON and the horizontal registration sensor PS14 operates to check the edge of the paper The detection is executed each time paper is picked up from the lower feeding assembly Detection start position differs for each copy paper ideally it is set to a po
114. gt OF Cassette pick up motor Cassette Pick Up Operation Pick Up Operation The pick up roller is rotated by the cassette pick up motor M4 The cassette pick up motor is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise under the control of the cassette pick up PCB When copy paper is supplied from the upper cassette of the pick up unit the cassette motor is rotated clockwise when paper is from the lower cassette on the other hand the cassette pick up motor rotates counterclockwise Pick Up Roller Shaft Reference When the cassette is installed to the machine the pick up roller is lowered or the lifter is raised in reference to the position of the pick up roller shaft Drive Control The pick up roller is rotated by the drive of the pick up motor M4 coming by way of gears The cas sette pick up motor rotates clockwise or counterclockwise to drive the upper lower cassette When the cassette pick up motor rotates clockwise the rotation of the motor moves up the gear 1 to drive the pick up roller of the upper cassette when the motor rotates counterclockwise on the either hand the gear 1 moves down to drive the pick up roller of the lower cassette See Figure 3 609 for how the pick up roller is driven Gear 1 t Gear 1 movement during CW rotation Gear 1 movement during CCW rotation Figure 3 609 Movement of Gear 1 in Relation to the CW CCW Rotation of the Cassette Pick Up Motor M4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 20
115. installed oL 1 1 Main scanning direction signal 1 Output ec Outline signal lt gt Output conceptual diagram Slice level lt May be changed CST LOOP Use it to adjust arching cassette pick up for factory use 0 65535 MF LOOP 3 202 Use it to adjust arching multifeeder pick up for factory use COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 0 65535 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON j OPERATIONS AND TIMING Item Description Settings Remarks DENS ADJ Use it to make adjustments if the copy image is foggy as a result of executing copy density auto correction 5 Copy density Z Higher setting gt White Original density Use it to fine adjust the point at which data for shading correction is measured on the standard white plate The adjustment is in units of 1 12 mm about 0 083 mm The presence of scratches on the stan dard white plate can cause noticeable white vertical lines on copies If such is the case shift the point of measurement in ADJ S reverse Point of measurement Standard white plate LASER OFF Use it to adjust the laser OFF timing trailing edge 0 65535 PWM 600 MIN PWM 600 MAX PWM
116. laser path when servic ing around the machine s laser system Be sure to remove watches rings or accessories before servicing the machine A laser beam is a visible light and can cause permanent damage to the eye You will see a label Figure 1 603 on some covers of the machine take extra care when ser vicing mechanisms under such covers FS5 8624 DANGER aser radiation when open AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE Figure 1 603 In the copier the label is attached to the laser scan ner system cover which is used to prevent radiation of laser lights CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Safety of Toner Toner is a non toxic material consisting of plastic iron and small amounts of dye If toner comes into contact with the skin or clothing remove it with dry tissue and wash with water Do not use hot water as such will turn the toner into gel and cause it to fuse with the fibers of the cloth Further do not bring toner into con tact with plastic material as such will initiate chemical reaction Caution Do not dispose of toner in fire It may explode COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 31 CHAPTER 2 COPYING PROCESS IMAGE FORMATION 2 1 F Development step 4
117. may be supplied through phase control AC Zero cross signal Fixing heater drive signal J J 3 3 Supply power to fixing heater Heater OFF Power applied to heater Figure 3 641 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 121 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Detecting Overheating on the Fixing Heater End The rear end of the fixing heater is equipped with a sub thermistor TH2 to check for overheat ing This is to prevent overheating and consequent damage to the fixing film which could occur when continuous copying is performed using copy of B4 or smaller in size Overheating tends to occur where the drum is not in contact with paper When the output of THE2 exceeds 250 C the machine increases the sheet to sheet distance to accelerate heat discharge of the fixing heater thereby preventing overheating Copying operation is continued with the increased sheet to sheet distance even after the output of TH2 falls below 250 C If overheating continues after increasing the sheet to sheet distance and the temperature exceeds 260 C the on going copying operation will be stopped and the power will be turned OFF E001 will be registered 3 122 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 5 Protection Mechanisms The machine is equipped with the following protection mechanisms to prevent malfunction of the fixing heater a Ther
118. mm 11 17 279x432mm max Postcard A6 vertical Paper source 500 sheets in each cassette 50 sheets in multifeeder 80 g m paper Types of copy paper Cassette Plain paper 64 to 80 g m tracing paper SM1 80 colored paper recycled paper 64 to 80 g m envelope 10 Monarch DL C5 B5 No 4 Multifeeder Plain paper 64 to 128 g m tracing paper GNT80 trans postcard label sheet recycled paper 64 to 80 g m envelope Two sided overlay copying Auto matic Multi feeder Canon recommended paper May be used but may not feed as expected COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Plain paper 64 to 80 g m Plain paper 64 to 128 g m no overlay copying 1 3 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Cassette Claw Non Regular universal 55 mm max stacking height about 500 sheets of 80 g m paper Multifeeder tray 50 sheets 80 g m Delivery tray 100 sheets approx 80 g m Non Leading trailing edge 2 5 mm in Direct image width Left right 2 5 mm in Direct Auto clear Provided Auto shut off Provided 2 min standard may be varied between 0 an 9 min in 1 min increments Feeder Sorter Multi Output Tray C1 Multi Output Tray B2 Pedestal Cassette Feeding Unitl L1 Cassette Feeding Unitl M1 Others Handset A1 C
119. mode COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 21 5 INSTALLATION Kw 5 Adjusting NL for model with FAX function only Work Remarks Start FAX service mode Starting FAX Service Mode 1 Check to make sure that the handle of the separation static eliminator cleaning brush is inserted into the fixing assembly releas ing assembly In addition make sure that the door switch actuator is inserted into the door switch assembly Push the service switch with a hex key Press the key twice The Service Mode Menu screen will appear Press 8 FAX on the screen and press the OK key The Menu screen will appear Press 2 MENU on the Menu screen and press the OK key Press NLEQ on the screen to highlight When the ON OFF Setting screen has appeared press or OFF The select ed notation will be highlighted Press the OK key Press the Cancel key and press the Reset key twice to end service mode 5 22 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION 6 Communications Test for machines equipped with fax functions Work Remarks Remove the static eliminator cleaning brush and the door switch actuator then close the front door Perform test shots to make sure Taking Test Shots that the image
120. o 9 1 Z lt O c e o og 8 o 5 oos s 2 5 5015 o 5 HE 28 z 955 9 s 5 Q605 CPU 5 J209 B4 J209 B5 4209 4 9 8 8 E S 8 E o o o 5 5 2 J102 B6 5 J102 B7 191 J102 A1 A7 DC controller PCB Figure 3 504 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 63 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gra a Transfer Bias This bias is used for transfer of toner from the photosensitive drum to copy paper and is of a positive voltage For output timing see Figure 3 505 b Cleaning Bias Since the machine uses direct transfer toner from the photosensitive drum can stick to transfer charg ing roller because of a jam A negative voltage is applied as follows thereby returning the toner from the transfer charging roller to the photosensitive drum During initial rotation after a press on the Copy Start key Part of the last rotation period During roller cleaning initiated in user mode adjustment cleaning in this case the primary charg ing roller is cleaned at the same time c Reference Bias At times the transfer efficiency varies because of changes in the environment or in the resistance of the transfer charging roller To prevent deterioration of images by such variations the level of the applica tion voltage to the tr
121. of the composite power supply PCB goes 1 the secondary side of the main trans former T101 turns ON to apply a cleaning bias negative to the transfer charging roller The timing at which the cleaning bias is applied is determined by serial communication data exchanged with the DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC c Turning ON and OFF the Transfer Charging Roller The transfer charging roller bias is turned ON and OFF by the transfer bias control signal TFW PWM and the transfer bias ON signal When the TFWON signal goes 0 the trans former T502 turns ON 3 Adjusting the Transfer Charging Roller Bias If image faults occur as a result of an incorrect transfer charging roller bias the transfer bias may be adjusted under TRN 1 TRN 2TS or TRN 20L in service mode 3 ADJUST An image fault may be any of the following CD Fogging is noted in the margin along the trail ing edge because of stray toner 2 The density of copies increases every 94 intervals approx when making half tone copies entire surface In the case of increase the setting in the case of 2 decrease the setting Use TRN 1 to adjust the transfer bias for copying on the 1st side Use TRN 2ST to adjust the transfer bias for copying on the 2nd side of a two sided copy Use TRN 20L to adjust the transfer bias for copying on the 2nd side of an overlay copy CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PR
122. or out of the machine 1 Lifter Up Pick Up Roller Shaft Down sliding in the cassette a Pick Up Roller Shaft Down When the cassette is installed while the main power supply is ON the following cause the pick up roller shaft to lower until it comes into contact with the surface of the copy paper The rear end of the cassette pushes in the lever 1 of the pick up unit mechanically The main motor M1 and the pick up solenoid SL2 turn ON in response to the activation of the cas sette size sensor causing the pick up lever to swing The pick up roller shaft is subject to control by the lever 1 and the pick up lever Pick up roller shaft Pick up roller Cassette Figure 3 615 Movement of the Lever 1 When the Cassette is Slid In b Lifter Up When the main power is turned ON with the cassette inside the machine or the cassette is slid in dur ing standby the pick up roller shaft lowers to push down the lifter trigger lever When one end of the lifter trigger lever is pushed in by the pick up roller shaft the drive of the main motor M1 causes the lifter to rise When the pick up roller shaft which is in contact with the surface of copy paper has moved up to a specific height the movement of the lever returns the pick up roller shaft to uppermot position ending the lifter ascent operation Figure 3 616 Moving Up the Lifter COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU
123. pick up in 2 on 1 mode DOC ST B Use it to adjust the origi nal stop position for lower separation pick up P INTRVL B Use it to adjust the origi nal stop position for lower separation pick up in 2 on 1 mode 3 238 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING When this mode is selected the sheets set on the RF s original tray will be picked up and stopped on the copyboard glass Check how they are stopped and make adjustments so that they are stopped cor rectly B Making Adjustments Start service mode 2 Select the appropriate item Press the appropriate item to highlight 3 Place copy paper on the RF s original tray as follows n the case of DOC ST or ST B place one sheet of copy paper n the case of P INTRVL or INTRVL place two A4 sheets of copy paper 4 Enter a setting on the keypad n the case of DOC ST or DOC ST A higher setting will result in a shift to the trailing edge A lower setting will result in a shift to the leading edge In the case of P INTRVL T or P INTRVL A higher setting will increase the sheet to sheet distance A lower setting will decrease the sheet to sheet distance 5 Press the OK key The sheet on the original tray will be picked up and stopped on the copyboard glass 6 Open the RF slowly and check where the paper has be
124. roller clutch Multifeeder pick up roller j NE J114 B8 I Registration roller Multifeeder paper P CL2 sensor PS4 MFCD re registration e Co aper 1 roller sensor PS5 mu 5 E tray 3 Paper guide plate a Separation pad Paper guide plate drive cam Spling clutch mm J114 B13 gt PRDSD ES Jj Multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid Figure 3 627 1 3 100 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND 2 Detecting the Size of Copy Paper in the Multifeeder Detecting the Width of Paper The width of copy paper is detected by the variable resistor VR1751 operating in conjunction with the movement of the slide guide The slide guide settings are registered when the user makes adjustments for the copy paper set on the multifeeder tray Rear Front Registration The rear front registration for pick up in the multifeeder is by adjusting the screw on the slide guide For details see the Service Handbook Detecting the Length of Paper The length of paper is detected in reference to how long the pre registration sensor PS5 remains ON during copying The maximum size of copy paper is 432 x 279 mm 11 x 17 Slide guide rear Variable resistor Multifeeder tray Slide guide front Figure 3 6
125. roller starts to rotate in reverse for face down delivery See Figure 3 650 and Table 3 613 for the electrical parts involved in face down delivery Main motor Set back roller motor Lower feeding assembly inlet roller motor Delivery roller motor Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid Fixing rear paper sensor Lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor Delivery sensor Table 3 613 Electrical Parts 3 127 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 128 When the leading edge of the last copy reach es the fixing paper sensor PS7 the paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 turns ON to move the copy paper to the lower feeding assembly Copy paper Figure 3 651 Paper Deflecting Plate 1 Solenoid ON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 When the leading edge of the last copy reach es the lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor PS12 and a specific period of time passes the lower feeding assembly inlet motor M7 starts to rotate in reverse A spe cific period of time thereafter the delivery motor M8 turns ON for face down delivery A specific period of time after the delivery roller motor M8 has turned ON the paper deflecting plate SL5 turns OFF SL5 OFF Figure 3 652 Paper Deflecting Plate 1 Solenoid OFF CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND 2 Sequence of Operations See Figur
126. sep aration pad cover 2 in the direction of B 1 Open the front door and remove the fixing inside cover then remove the fixing unit 4 connectors 1 screw 1 grounding screw 2 Remove the drum unit 3 Disconnect the connector D and remove the grounding screw 2 Remove the screw and remove the feeding i assembly positioning pin 3 then remove the B us gt feeding assembly 4 from the front f 4 Figure 4 411 4 Remove the separation pad retaining plate 3 by releasing the hook 2 Figure 4 413 Figure 4 412 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 21 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 2 Removing the Feeding Fan 1 Remove the feeding assembly 2 Remove the screw and remove the transfer charging roller unit from the feeding assembly 3 Remove the three bushing 1 and the gear 2 by disengaging the hooks 4 Remove the screw and remove the static eliminator 3 5 Remove the feeding fan assembly 4 from the mount in the direction of the arrow Figure 4 414 6 Disconnect the connector 5 and remove the feeding belt 6 as if to displace it Ln i 00000
127. sig nal DCON from the DC controller PCB The primary side of the main transformer T101 on the composite power supply PCB oper ates under the control of the CPU Q605 When the DCON signal is sent to the composite power supply PCB the CPU Q605 generates the DC bias control signal BPWM thereby turning ON the secondary side of the main transformer T101 and applying the DC component of the developing bias 3 Controlling the DC Component of the Developing Bias to a Specific Voltage The CPU Q605 on the composite power sup ply PCB receives the application voltage from the voltage detection circuit while the DC component of the developing bias is being applied This way the duty ratio of the BPWM signal is varied so as to ensure that the DC output voltage is main tained to a specific value COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 Turning ON and OFF the AC Component of the Developing Bias The developing AC drive circuit on the com posite power supply PCB receives drive pulse sig nals from the CPU Q605 When the AC drive signal ACON is sent directly from the DC con troller PCB to the AC drive circuit the AC compo nent generation transformer T400 turns ON to add an AC component to the DC component of the developing bias Application frequency 1838 Hz Application voltage 800 Vp p 5 Varying the DC Component of the Developing Bias The density of the image during copying is adjusted by varying the density correct
128. supply PCB PU 3 172 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 Version Indication 2 5th screen The indication is given when an expansion board is installed and therefore no indication appears in the absence of such a board 1 DISPLAY 05 PRONT xxxx NIB xxxx PS PCL xxxx SCSI xxxx Ct JU Item Description Indicates the version number of the Protocol Control PCB NIB Indicates the version number of the Network Interface Board NIB PS PCL Indicates the version number of the Printer Board PS PCL SCSI Indicates the version number of the SCSI Board COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 173 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 Key Editor Indication 7th screen 1 DISPLAY 06 KEY CHK xxH DF SIZE xx EDIT X gt XXx xmm EDIT Y gt XXx xmm DOC SIZE TKEY OK START bb C OK Item Description KWY CHK Indicates the code of a specific key that is being pressed except the Reset key See the next page DF SIZE Indicates the size of the original detected by the ADF or the RDF EDIT X Indicates the editor input coordinates EDIT Y EDIT X X direction EDIT Y Y direction DOC SIZE Indicates the size of the original detected by the original si
129. them unless other wise noted 3 Identify the types of screws according to length diameter and location 4 Mounting screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with washers to ensure electrical continuity Be sure to use such washers where necessary 5 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 6 Do not remove any screws that are paint locked during work 1 BEFORE THE WORK C Feeding Assembly 4 21 POINTS TO NOTE 4 1 D Lower Feeding Assembly 4 23 A Main Power Switch and Others 4 1 E Registration Roller Assembly 4 23 B Handling the Harnesses 4 2 F Delivery Assembly 4 24 Il EXTIERNALS niet 4 3 EXPOSURE 4 27 A External 4 3 A Illuminating Assembly 4 27 B Inside 4 4 COD Unit iie 4 28 C Control 4 6 5 eit nee 4 29 D pre 4 7 D Laser Scanner Assembly 4 30 DRIVE ASSEMBLY 4 8 VI DEVELOPING SYSTEM 4 32 A Scanner Drive Assembly 4 8 A Developing Assembly 4 32 B Fixing Drive Assembly 4 13 FIXING
130. to 128 g m paper Remove the curling before the second copy ing run for a post card or thick paper 128 g m 5 Using ID Mode In ID mode you must enter a 4 digit ID num ber to make copies As many as 100 ID numbers may be stored and you can check the count number of copies made by number for control of copying volume by group a 1 Setting the System Control Password Select user mpde custom common set tings and then system settings password setting to set the system control password Storing ID Numbers Set the system control password Select custom common settings and DEPT ID MANAGEMENT to enter the system con trol password Select yes to DEPT ID MANAGEMENT and store the appropriate group ID and ID number for STORE DEPT ID PASSWORD Entering an ID Number Press the ID icon in the upper right corner of the Basic screen Enter the appropriate ID and password Cleaning the Count all ID numbers Select user mode custom common set tings and then DEPT ID MANAGEMENT to enter the system control password On the DEPT ID MANAGEMENT screen select ON and then COPY TOTALS then press CLEAR ALL TOTALS Note You cannot clear the counts individually 1 18 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTIO
131. to rotate the paper deflecting plate 1 counter clockwise The paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 turns OFF so that the paper deflecting plate 1 is restrained by the force of the spring ede Registration roller Y Delivery roller Vertical path roller 1 Re pick up roller Set back roller 2 Details of the movement of l Flow of copy paper 2 Flow of copy paper the paper deflecting plate 8 SL5 ON Pulling into the lower feeding assembly Copying on the 1st side of a two sided for reversed delivery when copying on the copy when delivering the last copy gt 1st side of an overlay copy Figure 3 628 1 3 104 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Sequence of Operations overlay copying Copy paper is discharged of sent to the lower feeding assembly by switching the feeding path by the paper deflecting plate 1 The feeding patch is witched by turning ON and OFF the paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid 1 SL5 The paper deflecting solenoid 1 SL5 turns ON a specific period of time after copy paper has moved past the fixing rear paper sensor PS7 See Figure 3 628 2 for the sequence of operations used for overlay copy ing and Table 3 609 for the relationship between electrical parts and the DC controller PCB Pick up start
132. tors Composite power supply PCB 2 screws all connectors Remove the three screws 2 and disconnect the two connectors 3 then remove the set back roller motor assembly Figure 4 314 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON eee 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM E Pick Up Drive Assembly 1 Removing the Main Motor 1 Disconnect the power plug and remove the following Rear cover 4 screws Flywheel 3 screws 2 Remove the four screws 2 and disconnect the two connectors 3 then remove the main motor 1 Figure 4 315 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 Removing the Pick Up drive Unit 1 Disconnect the power plug and remove the following Rear cover 4 screws Flywheel 3 screws Scanner cooling fan hook connector 2 Remove the pick up unit See p 4 13 3 Release the belt Figure 4 316 4 Remove the harness retainer 2 two high voltage cable 3 and power supply cord mount 4 2 screws Figure 4 317 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 15 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM _____ ______ 4 16 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Disconnect the seven connectors 5 Remove the registration roller clutch 6 Remove the four screws 8 and remove the pick up drive unit
133. value higher than 10 may be entered Any such number will be treated as 5 for control COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 207 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING G 4 FUNCTION function mode Use this mode to operate the machine under a specific set of settings or execute auto adjustment Check to make sure that the machine is in standby mode before executing any item Each press on the key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen Press the item notation for operation or auto adjustment to highlight Press the key to execute the selected item Press the key to return to the Menu screen A press on the and a key on the keypad put the corresponding number into the parentheses 4 FUNCTION1 apresson the key then causes a leap to the corresponding page Clearing Errors 4 FUNCTION 01 gt ERROR OK CLEAR Ct Item Description Reference page Clearing E000 E001 E003 To clear an error indication press ERROR on the E004 007 01 or E717 screen to highlight then press the OK key and turn OFF ON the main power switch 3 208 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Stirring the Toner 4 FUNCTION 02 gt TONER S 240 START OK STOP
134. xlala a 41451 e s E 33 ale g 313 als e a 91 2 81 8 5 5 8 8 21510 BIETER 215 6 51514 0101 414010 e ze Youn t 4 E 8 22 5 a CEI 272272 ODD SOTER J204 9 B 5 J204 10 0 POWER Lad gt CASEPEDE Je6 5 Duplexing unit J80 inlet motor Drum ambient 512 temperature Duplexing unit inlet sensor paper sensor J89 813J70 Delivery assembly paper deflecting Scanning lamp intensity sensor Delivery reversing motor COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON J177 SYS MOTHER General Circuit Diagram 1 4 General Circuit Diagram 2 4 8 7 L 6 5 4 3 2 1 Upper cassette Horizontal registration Cassette pick up motor Vertical path roll clutch delivery detection SERS POWER SUPLLY M4 2 Feeding fan 1 59 w s 55 Upper cassette Lower cassette 2 size detection size detection I a Registration clutch CS SIZE U CS SIZE D Exhaust Lower feeding assembly 9990 9 Multifeeder pick up Multiteeder relay fan 1 re pick up clutc i 9 64 clutch releasing solenoid 8 J1602 9 5 eet SL3 Scanner home position sensor J1605 ET PS 4150 assette pick up 91801 91604 E 4
135. 0 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 87 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Feeding roller Cassette pick up motor M4 Gear 1 Pick up roller Separation roller Figure 3 610 Pick Up Drive for the Upper Cassette pick up motor rotating CW Feeding roller Cassette pick up roller M4 Pick up roller Separation roller Figure 3 611 Pick Up Drive for the Lower Cassette pick up motor rotating CCW 3 88 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww ssri 3 OPERATIONS AND Moving Up Down pick up the Pick Up Roller The pick up roller and the feeding roller are supported by a roller holder and the pick up roller oper ates around the feeding roller shaft The up down movement of the pick up roller shaft is driven using the drive of the main motor M1 through the cam 1 controlled by the pick up solenoid SL2 In standby the pick up roller shaft is at uppermost position The following operations take place when picking up a single sheet of copy paper 1 2 3 When the pick up solenoid SL2 turns ON the drive of the main motor M1 causes the cam 1 to make a single rotation The single rotation of the cam causes the pick up lever to swing As the lever swings the pick up roller shaft lowers once to come into contact with the copy paper and the drive of the pick up motor M4 is used to pick up
136. 0 SLEEP 1 to SLEEP 2 Power OFF in which the main power switch When all the following conditions exist is OFF When there is no transmission reserva SLEEP 1 in which quick start mode is tions When there is no timer operations reserva enabled SLEEP 2 in which power saving mode is tions e g timer polling timer reporting enabled When there is no reception document Standby in which the machine is ready for When there is no document waiting for operation printing During on hook When there is no Printer Board The machine moves through these states as 2203 When the power saving switch is at the bot follows D Power OFF to Standby tom When the main power switch is turned ON 5 SLEEP 2 to SLEEP 1 f Standby to SLEEP 1 When an incoming call is detected When the control panel power switch is 6 SLEEP 2 to Standby turned ON During off hook When the control panel power switch is When auto power off is enabled or e When weekly timer is enabled turned ON When the power saving switch is turned ON from bottom to top Device CPU on CPU on image FAX image Description composite processor memory power supply PCB Retained by battery None Power OFF Stops Fax reception is SLEEP 2 enabled after arrival moves to SLEEP 1 Functions not requir ing operations are enabled e g fax transmission fax reception printin
137. 00 ms 1 sec after it has detected 135 3 261 Main cause The fixing temperature drops abnormally Thermistor TH1 TH2 off con tact poor contact open circuit Fixing heater open circuit cracking Fixing heater drive circuit faulty DC controller PCB faulty 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gra Description The main thermistor TH1 detects less than 150 C for 200 ms after it has detect ed 150 The sub thermistor TH2 detects less than 150 C for 200 ms after it has detect ed 150 The fixing film has become dis placed Fixing film wrong position tear Tension roller wrong position wrong operation Fixing film motor faulty Fixing film sensor faulty The output of the fixing film sensor contin ues to be 1 or 0 for 2 1 sec or more The fixing film has become fully displaced Fixing film recovery mechanism fault The displacement is not corrected after executing film recovery mode which turns on when the main power is tuned off and on in response to E007 The main motor fails to lock Main motor M1 faulty DC controller PCB faulty The main motor does not lock for 10 sec after it is started The value is outside a specific range and the main motor does not lock for 3 sec The total counter fails to operate Total counter CNT1 CNT2 open circuit DC controller PCB faulty A check is made immediately before the counter
138. 000 100V FG5 6325 000 200 000 120V FG5 6326 000 200 000 230V fixing cleaning roller 3068 000 200 000 Included in fixing assembly lower fixing roller 3064 000 200 000 Included in fixing assembly Scanning lamp FH7 3314 000 200 000 Transfer charging roller FF5 4565 000 200 000 Pick up feeding roller FF5 4552 000 100 000 Actual copies used for Separation roller RF5 1426 000 200 000 Actual copies used for Manual feed separation pad FC1 9022 030 200 000 Pre exposure lamp FG5 6297 000 200 000 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Developing cylinder FG5 6222 000 400 000 100V FG5 8705 000 400 000 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 MAY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 120V 230V 6 1 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING ww SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART r Note 1 Provide scheduled servicing every 100 000 copies 2 Check the service book before setting out for a visit take parts if replacement is expected Work Checks Remarks Meet the person in charge Check the general condition Record the counter reading Check the faulty copies Make test copies Check the following r Note a Image density Standards 2 5 b Background for soiling 1 0 mm c Characters for clarity d Leading edge margin Note e Fixing registration back for s
139. 107 B9 image processor communica J111 35 tion signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 183 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Address i Indication PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal primary charging roller clean J113 B2 ing solenoid counter 3 drive 115 230V J107 B8 model electrical unit fan drive option J112 9 exhaust fan 1 half speed PCB internal signal laser fan half speed PCB internal signal electrical unit fan half speed PCB internal signal exhaust fan 2 drive J107 B1 exhaust fan half speed PCB internal signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 3 184 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 CPU Input Output Ports of the DC Controller 2 DISPLAY 03 IP PAO XXXXXXXX IP PBO IP PCO bb OK Address i Indication Jack PA0 primary charging DC bias J102 B9 switching developing bias DC application J102 B8 mode transfer output m
140. 15 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 9 5 INSTALLATION Kawai D Installing the Drum Cartridge Work Turn OFF the main power switch Release the developing assembly lever Remove the static eliminator and clean with the special cleaning brush After cleaning put back the separation static eliminator Push it until a click is felt Seperation static eliminator Remove the dust proofing glass and clean it with lint free paper thereafter put the dust proofing Dust proofing glass glass back into its original posi tion 5 10 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www TAr a 5 INSTALLATION W120V model 230V model see 5 12 Unpack the drum unit and remove the two primary charging roller releasing rolls without removing the drum cover Do not remove the drum cover to prevent damage Hold the drum at its middle when taking it out of the box to prevent damage Remarks Primary charging roller releasing roll Remove Primary charging roller releasing roll Remove Do not remove Check to make sure that the developing assembly is released then without removing the drum cover insert the drum unit slowly along the rail COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 Drum unit
141. 15 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON i System Configuration The GP200 GP215 Series machine may be configured as follows ADF F1 comes standard with some models 1 eee GP215F w fax function GP215 w o fax function GP200F w fax function w o duplexing function Multi Output Tray C1 Multi Output Tray B2 GP200 w o fax function w o duplexing function Orense Handset Cassette Feeding Unit L1 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION JPEATURES entere 1 1 B Control 1 14 SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 C Basic Operation 1 16 NAMES OF PARTS 1 8 D Extension 1 19 A External View 1 8 E Costom Common Settings 1 25 B Cross Section 1 10 V ROUTINE WORK BY THE USER 1 29 C Arrangement of Extension Boards 1 12 eite 1 30 IV OPERATION carens 1 13 A Laser 1 30 A Turning On the Power Switches 1 13 B Safety of Toner 1 31
142. 2 39 38 37 36 i 34 83 82 81 80 29 88 Figure 1 304 1 1 10 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON wsT 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION No 3 mirror No 2 mirror No 1 mirror Scanning lamp fluorescent lamp Laser unit Drum cleaner assembly Pre exposure lamp Lens Primary charging roller Drum unit CCD Laser mirror Dust proofing glass Developing assembly Multifeeder pick up roller Multifeeder tray Vertical path roller 1 Vertical path roller 2 Cassette pick up feeding lower G 9 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 6 8 6 6 Cassette pick up feeding upper Cassette 2 separation roller Cassette 2 feeding roller Cassette 2 pick up roller Cassette 1 separation roller Cassette 1 feeding roller Cassette 1 pick up roller Lower feeding assembly outlet roller Registration roller Transfer roller Separation static eliminator Set back roller cassette 1 Feeding assembly Fan Cassette 2 Fixing assembly Delivery roller 1 Paper deflecting plate Delivery roller 2 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 11 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION E Arrangement of Extension Boards 1 Arrangement Figure 1 306 D SCSI Board 6 System Motherboard 2 CIST Bo
143. 2 Check the screen to make sure that the VR output is indicated under AD xxx as soon as the side guide is adjusted to A6R Then press MF A6R to highlight and press the OK key The value will be stored under MF A6R 3 Likewise place and A4R sheet in the multifeeder and adjust the side guide to A4R 4 Check to make sure that the AD value has been indicated then press A4R to highlight and press the OK key The value will be stored under A4R 5 Then place an A4 sheet of paper in the multifeed er and adjust the side guide to A4 6 Check to make sure that the AD value has been indicated then press A4 to highlight and press the OK key The value will be stored under A4 7 Press the Reset key twice to end service mode 8 Turn off and then on the main power switch 3 214 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 8 Checking the Control Panel Indications 4 FUNCTION 08 gt LCD CHK OK START SCANLANP OK START DISP LED OK START MOGI Description Reference page LCD CHK checking for missing dots on LCD 1 Press LCD CHK to highlight 2 Press the OK key The entire face of the LCD reverses white video keys and notations disappear 3 Press the area where the OK key was shown The entire face of the LCD reverses black video
144. 2 WhenFORMAT 3 has appeared press the Size 3 key 3 When FORMAT 3 has appeared press the 1 Press the Qy key so that ESO key SIZE 3 B4lappears 3 FORMAT 3 lappears and the cursor flash 2 Find the size for LGL from the conver es for a while during formatting The control type will be set to 3 when the flashing sion code table Table 5 506 and press stops 1 and 3 SIZE 3 13 5 Setting a new control type number will clear 4 Press the END key the unit price upper limit value counter 9 SIZE LGL appears to end the reading and ID number requiring you to re change enter them 5 40 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Caution 1 For sizes 1 4 you cannot set the same 51 55 paper size code 11 A i A 2 The counter reading will not be cleared by SW1 1 SW1 3 SW1 5 SW5 1 SW5 3 SW5 5 changing the size SW1 2 SW1 4 SWi 6 SW5 2 SW5 4 SW5 6 10 3 Check the conversion code Figure 5 518 11 3 the setting of the DIP switch SW1 Size SW5 on the Copy Data Controller A1 See Postcard Jpn Table 3 1 U LARGE 2 E ifthe setting is not correct
145. 2 22 BAP Z eg7 v220 340 lt 1 OF 35797 2 APPENDIX Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 2 8 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 30 APPENDIX Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 3 8 2060 sieg d AUYMIHd sa 0 20 2 TAH 9189 H AH 0085 odd 31 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX KGwwwssw sss O t Diagram 4 8 Ircul Composite Power Supply C rr 8025 ks I L eui 2 sovo pp 90 18 HS ANS 2 gory 60rtu AS 5 Ve o 39uHvH2SIO 06r2 301n9 1 2220 goer ozvy V otra svie 3127 Wad SYI Stry d voro 32 V NOOV 607 18356 137ov A30 Ot soer 1 0070 90F2 gt motvH2I31 18384 01 0 SVI NXVHJIJL ozer 6079 12127 tira 0492 9 o ogru Otro 073 roro Leone beat sors
146. 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Item Description Settings Remarks RSIDE Use it to make adjustments if images on SENSHP paper picked up from the lower feeding assembly 2nd side of overlay two sided copies are often displaced to the rear or front e If the displacement is to the rear 0 65535 decrease the value in units of 23 sin Within 46 23x2 gle unit being equivalent to 1 mm of the factory If the displacement is to the front adjustment value increase the value in units of 23 a single unit being equivalent to 1 mm PVE OFST Use it to correct offset from the laser center f you have initialized the RAM or 200 200 replaced the image processor PCB enter the value recorded on the service label COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 201 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 Scanner Cassette and Laser Related Items Item 8 ADJUST 05 IC DENS CST LOOP MF LOOP DENS ADJ DXXXXX LASER OFF xxxxx lt PWM 600 MIN PWM 600 MAX XXXXX PWM 200 MIN XXXXX lt lt lt PWM 200 lt XXXXX Description Settings Remarks IC DENS Use it to adjust the original slice level in image create mode with the Image Editing Board
147. 215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX Kw Aa wrT sxmsooaiO DC Controller Circuit Diagram 8 13 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC A 14 APPENDIX t Diagram 9 13 DC Controller C NJOHI VIVOXH oy cetu QvOTXd oxi Oxd uis axi uis 034 80105 sor T sotr dW31H ox lt 95 AS 94 4 AS x65 DIiova HOLIMS YE 0615 215 GWHS Qui 8049 tote 922 AvE 6018 T 0718 ds vot E AAA iu set 1610 NIBE U23 Neet eoTn a d vwora v 0 Y varia 48404 0 eorr 4 st etve lt 0 gt 0 lt 8 gt 0 9 2019 NAWNOAY ai al a A 15 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX KGwwwC 2 sm w sw sa t Diagram 10 13 DC Controller d v2so d E252 d eesa d 2s2 070252 wd 152 wd ETSI 2552 077759 070759 d 1138 8711968 wy 1738 d0d G33 or eota or 3215 31135572 6050
148. 245 4246 4217 2 Door switch gt amp 8 5v 5 el 9 Main power switch BAS ola zdal E x 5 544 84 5 3 E 115VONLY 1 6 7IPIeI P i 2 501 5 OVD J113 612 2 REMOTE x 9443 8414 o x ae ay J24 1 2 24 2 ui n 24 3 9 a J24 4 lal aped 8 0 2 gt el elzleiz le lt lt lt gt zi ziziziz 4 onang ere 5552 9 9 9 9 S TO 230VONLY P zy 8 1114 m Re p 4444 ay J180 4184 J182 19909 oF 2288 4 2 LEO LD T FUSER BIAS gt FAXM EDIT ELEC 8 29 z DC CON IP SoTER 5 5 585585 5 8 2 5 882 lt el o ol 9 ol II 3 131 12 12 gt olo e Iojzi gt gt gt gt 2 5 tr 3 32125 98151518 21515159 55 5 53 ISIS 218121 1210141819 od ed ad bt ba FUSEA e o 24 2 2131 3 3 3 3 a 8 e 2 8 e 2 2 e e T9797 795029 O O 1 99009999009990999009 22589 544 J120 CHECK 9121 CHECK J102 55555555955 4105 DC controller PCB 2 J106 5 x x 8 9 z gt 00000000000 o d lt 144444544 438 4 2 E 1111 2111 21 fed gt gt elelelele e
149. 27 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 101 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KGww ssu oIOEmm 3 Sequence of Pick Up Operations multifeeder A4 2 copies Copy Start Key ON V INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW S Multifeeder relay releasing solenoid SL3 Multifeeder pick up clutch CL2 co Pre registration roller sensor PS5 Registration roller clutch CL1 Main motor M1 Figure 3 627 3 3 102 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING G Controlling the Registration Roller Clutch The registration roller clutch CL1 controls copy paper so that it matches with the image on the drum at a specific location You may change the timing at which the registration roller clutch turns ON in service mode 3 RESIST Selected mode Copy paper Shift mm Copy paper on copy tray gt jeD gt l5 one sided original one sided copy B one sided original copying on 1st side A gt gt 5 i two sided copy copying on 2nd side 78 two sided original copying on 1st side two sided copy copying on 2nd side two sided original copying on 1st side one sided copy copying on 2nd side May be page separation copying on 1st side left between 0 one sided
150. 3 630 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 107 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING GQ J Lower Feeding Assembly 1 Outline The sheets of copy paper moved to the lower feeding assembly for two sided overlay copying are stacked in a staggered pattern by the set back method and re picked up for copying on the second side In the set back mechanism sheets of copy paper are stacked in a staggered pattern so that double feeding may be avoided within limited space Parts name Notation Main motor M1 Set back roller motor M6 Lower feeding assembly inlet motor M7 Re pick up front paper sensor Lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor Re pick up flapper drive solenoid Lower feeding assembly re pick up clutch Table 3 610 Names of Electrical Parts DC controller PCB LIA 11 1 e Se 23 5 ES gt gt 5 Pall 9 Y PS12 CLS me Set back rollers up 5 Lower feeding assembly Figure 3 631 3 108 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND Paper sizes mm main x sub scanning directions B5 A5 STMT 179 40 x 215 90 297 00 x 210 00 266 70 x 203 20 268 00 x 290 00 257 00 x 182 00 210 00 x 148
151. 420mm A4 210 x 297mm A4R 297 x 210mm Ab 148 5 x 210mm A5R 210 x 148 5mm B4 267 x 364mm B5 182 x 257mm B5R 257 x 182mm Reduce gt gt B5 gt A4 B4 gt B5 B4 A4 B5 gt A5 gt B4 5 gt B5 Enlarge A5 gt A4 gt B5 gt B4 A4 gt B4 5 gt B5 B4 A3 B5 gt B4 Table 1 201 Copying Speed copier only 1 6 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ratio Copies min DIRECT LTR 20 11x17 11 LGL 14 LTRR 17 STMT 22 STMT R 20 REDUCE LGL LTRR 17 11x17 LGL 15 11x17 LTRR 16 11x17 2STMTR 19 11x15 gt LTRR 16 ENLARGE LGL 11x17 12 LTR R gt 11x17 12 STMTR o 11x17 12 Table 1 202 Copying Speed copier only Specifications subject to change for product improvement COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 7 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION II NAMES OF PARTS A External View Model with RDF G1 as Standard Ius bl E 5 A iz a 2 CN 4 Figure 1 301 D Deliery tray 2 1 8 Control panel power switch 4 Original delivery tray for RDF 5 Mul
152. 50 215 90 x 139 70 Table 3 611 Accommodating Paper in the Lower Feeding Assembly COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Others AB Inch CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 B5R A5R 11 x 17 LGL B OFFI A OFFI A LGL AUS FLS FOOLSCAP FOLIO G LGL E DFFI OFFICIO A LTRR LTRR K LGLR G LTTR A LTR STMTR 3 109 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Set Back Operations a Stacking Operation copying on 1st side 1 Copy paper is moved to the lower feeding assembly and is arched 1st copy paper being made to arch 2 The set back roller rotates clockwise to feed the copy paper until it moves past the lower feeding assembly inlet sensor N PS12 36 8 2 8 8 3 If the copy paper is A4 or larger 514 operates the flapper to prevent the copy paper from moving to the re pick up roller Copy paper 9 Set back rollers Re pick up roller 3 110 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 3 OPERATIONS AND 4 The set back rollers are rotated in reverse to move and stop the copy paper to and at a specific posi tion N PS12 Specific distance o f 9 gt Copy paper Set back rollers Re pick up roller 5 The 2nd copy paper is fed to the lower feeding assembly PS12 2nd copy paper Las c
153. 6 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Cassette Size The upper cassette and the lower cassette differ in size The upper cassette may be used for copy paper of B4 or smaller Inside the cassette are the side guide plates side rear end which must be adjusted by hand Since the size guide plates are not equipped with a sensor you must set the aforementioned rotary switch cor rectly Upper cassette middle size cassette for A5 through B4 Lower cassette large size cassette for A5 through Figure 3 626 Upper Lower Cassette Size Figure 3 627 Side Guide Plate COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 99 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING F Multifeeder 1 Outline The multifeeder is a mechanism in which a stack of copy paper placed on the multifeeder tray is picked up one by one from the top The copy paper stacked on the tray is pushed against the pick up roller by the paper guide The drive of the multifeeder pick up roller comes from the main motor M1 through the multifeeder pick up clutch CL2 The multifeeder pick up roller and the separation pad make sure that only one sheet of copy paper is picked up and fed to the registration roller This series of operations is repeated for each pick up opera tion Main motor driver PCB Pd J114 B6 Main motor Multifeeder pick up
154. 996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 22 wwYF APPENDIX Analog Processor Circuit Diagram 4 4 45V J1004 41001 1 a o 12V SaSu COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 6 C1049 C1050 C1051 C1052 01053 01040 01041 01042 01043 01044 01045 01046 01047 01055 970701 Storor 1112 ovoror 600791 00T2I 900721 600121 220721 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 23 APPENDIX F LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Laser Driver Circuit Diagram 1 2 2717 5245 6r ro gt 1 2 T 5 41219 gozv9I 290 vedo tdo do 440 2 E 2 zagu TASH 2 as Aut vases 9 2 ad 4 18 87 i 5 02501 totor d19 niue i orate 5 1 o 10217 gt t EASY LI 52 LU 702770 aS ZA A9U as 1 02212 S 1498 zoztaz etety TMS UsMOd 9 6TS 5 616 nN SIYO r 61Sr AS One 6tsr
155. A9 laser cooling fan drive J113 B3 PCB internal signal 3 182 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Address i Indication PC1 output set back motor drive J103 6 set back motor drive J103 7 set back motor drive J103 10 set back motor drive J103 11 duplexing unit inlet motor drive J105 B4 duplexing unit inlet motor drive J105 B5 duplexing unit inlet motor drive J105 B8 duplexing unit inlet motor drive J105 B9 delivery reversing motor drive J105 A6 delivery reversing motor drive J105 A7 delivery reversing motor drive J105 A10 delivery reversing motor drive J105 A11 bin 3 drive motor J104 11 bin 3 rive motor J104 12 bin 3 drive motor J104 13 bin 3 drive motor J104 14 scanner motor drive PCB internal signal scanner motor drive PCB internal signal scanner motor drive PCB internal signal scanner motor drive PCB internal signal scanner motor drive PCB internal signal scanner motor drive PCB internal signal scanning reference signal PCB internal signal scanning reference signal PCB internal signal scanning reference signal PCB internal signal scanning reference signal PCB internal signal Not used re pick up clutch drive J122 6 pre exposure lamp drive J107 A12 Not used fixing heater relay drive J
156. AN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Copy Density Auto Correction 3 There are three types of copy density auto correction execute the three types as a single set You must have executed shad ing auto correction before executing this mode PD density auto correction 2 200PWM density auto correction 3 600PWM density auto correction This mode is executed to correct the fol lowing D Laser characteristics 2 Developing bias Execute this mode for the following When replacing the laser unit When replacing the copier power supply PCB When image faults occur When replacing the image processor PCB Operation Open the front door and insert the handle of the separation static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing opening Separation static eliminator cleaning brush Figure 3 1009 Insert the door switch tool into the door switch actuator Press the service switch with a hex key will appear in the upper left corner of the LCD COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 Press the key twice e The Service Mode Menu screen will appear SERVICE MODE 1 DISPLAY 2 VO DISPLAY 3 ADJUST 4 FUNCTION 5 OPTION 6 COUNTER 7 ACC 8 FAX 443155 C Figure 3 1010 Press FUCNTION on the Menu screen 847 to highlight then press the OK key Press the Page key to brin
157. ANPLING OK DATA SET A xxx B xxx XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX MULTI 0 gt CASSETTE1 A4 1 CASSETTE2 A4 1 C Cok Press the Reset key twice 5 28 Place the Test Chart NA 3 on the copyboard glass and close the front cover halfway Then make copies at copy densi ty 5 in text mode test photo mode and photo mode Try all the cassettes and the multifeeder COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Optimum Images For text mode the white background must be free of fogging In text photo mode step edge No 10 must be barely visible and the white background must be free of fog ging photo mode the white background must be free of fogging Moire around step edges around halftone bands may be ignored CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 5 INSTALLATION After completing all the above installation Work install options sorter etc Handling the Photosensitive Drum after Installation The photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light and mere exposure to room lighting can lead to generation of copies with white spots or black bands Keep the following in mind to prevent problems Try to finish jam removal work within 5 min When taking the drum unit out of the copier for servicing wrap it in fresh copy paper and keep itin a dark place Do not touch the surface of the photosensiti
158. Area to be shifted Original be entire original 2 Center shift xm Xmax Ymax 3 Free shift Xp X Xmax Y Copy paper Yp 7 Ymax Z Figure 3 312 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 37 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING c Reduced Image Composition Reduced image composition mode may be any of the following two 1 2 on 1 mode in which two originals are reduced for copying on a single sheet of copy paper 2 4 1 mode in which four originals are reduced for copying on a single sheet of copy paper Executing these modes requires control under combination of reproduction ratio processing shift processing and overlay processing In reproduction ratio processing a reproduc tion ratio is computed based on the size of the original and the size of the copy Formula for Lengthwise Direction a copy paper length original length x 2 b copy paper length original length Formula for Breadthwise Direction copy paper width original width x 2 copy paper width original width Mode Duplexing unit RDF If the reproduction ratio in lengthwise direction and that in breadthwise direction are different the smaller of the two will be selected however the reproduction ratio will be between 25 and 800 Shift processing and overlay processing controlled as explained in the next page See
159. C CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 219 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 11 Checking the Image Processor PCB 4 FUNCTION 11 IP CHK OK START xx Description Reference page Image processor PCB self 1 Press IP CHK to highlight check 2 Press the OK key to start a check on the image processor PCB OK or NG will be indicated if NG replace the image processor PCB 3 220 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 12 Shading Adjustment for R amp D factory 4 FUNCTION 12 R amp D SHADING START OK START JUMP Now WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH GDA1 xxH GD2 xxH CDA4 ADDAS5 xxH D ODD xxH D EVN xxH WD GIGI Item Description Reference page R amp D factory shading auto cor 1 Place the standard white paper on the copyboard Service rection glass handbook 2 Press AUTO SHADING START on the screen to p 2 21 highlight then press the OK key 3 When a beep is sounded press the OK key LAMP LEVEL will be indicated on the screen while the lamp is being adjusted If no beep is heard turn VR1 on the DC controller PCB so that a beep will be heard then press the OK key 4 End the operation when END appears on the screen Guide to
160. DISPLAY in service mode 1 if this is the case n the case of E007 turning off and then on the main power switch will activate film recovery mode FILM COMEBACK in service mode 4 thereby resetting the machine after returning the film to its correct position If the film fails to return to the correct position after executing this recovery mode E007 01 will be indi cated If this happens replace the fixing assembly or take appropriate measures return the film to its correct position and execute ERROR in service mode 4 Note that E007 01 in service mode will be indicated as E007 omitting the last two digits under of DISPLAY in service mode 1 After the film has returned to normal position following the execution of FILM COMEBACK be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power supply without touching the other keys COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 265 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING B Self Diagnosis of the RDF G1 Main cause Description Data communication with copier faulty The communication is monitored at all times This error is identified when the communication with the copier is disrupted for 5 sec or more Pick up motor M1 fails to rotate Pick up roller sensor S5 faulty A flag is installed on the shaft of the pick up motor M1 and the rotation of M1 is monitored in reference t
161. Detecing Errors on the E Controlling the Scanning Lamp 3 24 Composite Power Supply PCB 3 74 F Identifying the Size of Originals 3 26 VI PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 3 76 IMAGE PROCESSING 3 29 An OUN 3 76 A 3 29 B Pick Up from the Cassette 3 79 B Analog Image Processing 3 31 C Non Pick Up Operation standby 3 91 C Digital Image Processing 3 33 D Detecting the Level of Copy Paper 3 93 IV LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 51 E Detecting the Size of Copy Paper 3 95 A Laser Processing Assembly 3 51 Multifeeder 3 100 B Generating the BD Signal 3 53 G Controlling the C Laser Driver Circuit 3 54 Registration Roller Clutch 3 103 D Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 3 56 H Making Overlay Copies 3 104 V IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3 58 Making Two Sided Copies 3 106 A High Voltage Transformer Circuit 3 58 J Lower Feeding Assembly 3 108 B Controlling the K Fixing Delivery Assembly 3 118 Primary Charging Roller Bias 3 60 L Delivery Assembly 3 127 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON iii M Detecting Jams
162. ED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 PD Density Auto Correction This mode must be executed in combination with 200PWM density auto correction and 600PWM den sity auto correction 45 FUNCTION 04 gt PD PRINT START WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY SAMPLING OK DATA SET A xxx B xxx XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX MULTI 0 gt CASSETTE1 A4 1 CASSETTE2 A4 1 Pb Item Description Reference page PD density auto correction 1 Press PD PRINT to highlight then press the Service Copy Start key handbook A 15 gradation test pattern will be generated p 2 21 2 Place a blank sheet of paper the whitest of all used by the user no color copier paper allowed on the copyboard glass then press WHITE MEASURE to highlight and press the OK key The scanner makes a single scan 3 Replace the paper with the test pattern generated previously then press DESNITY MEASURE to highlight and press the OK key Printed side down 4 Check the values under A B and D 20 lt A lt 50 40 lt B lt 40 0 lt D lt 8 5 If the values are as indicated press DAT SET to highlight and press the OK key COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 211 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 200PWM Density Auto Correction You must execute
163. F SIZE ORIGINAL Note 1 No next screen exists for Direct A text or text photo 2 Using the Preference key the most frequently used modes may be selected for display To select use custom copy setting in user mode 3 The DEF SIZE ORIGINAL key is effective only when an RDF is installed 1 16 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON wv Cs 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2 Operations Available during Copying D Stopping Copying To stop continuous copying press the Stop key or the Reset key 2 1 Copying will stop after completing the ongoing copying run 2 Switching from AE Mode to Manual density Control Mode You may switch from AE auto density control mode to manual density adjustment mode during continuous copying However you cannot switch from manual den sity adjustment mode during continuous copy ing 3 Interrupting On Going Copying To make copies of a different original press the Interrupt key to stop the on going copying Note The following keys are effective during con tinuous copying a Stop key b Reset key c Interrupt key d Copy Density key from AE to manual COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 3 Interrupting On Going Copying If you want to make copies of a different origi nal while making a large number of copies in con tinuous copying mode you can suspend the on g
164. Feeding fan Drawing Keeps copy paper on the feeding belt Exhaust fan Drawing Exhausts heat Laser cooling fan Drawing Cools the laser elements Electrical unit fan Drawing Exhausts heat from the electrical unit Lower feeding assembly Blowing Cooling copy paper in the lower feeding unit cooling fan Table 3 701 Figure 3 701 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 139 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gr 2 Sequence of Fan Operations main power Star key Control panel power switch ON ON switch OFF STBY INTR SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY SLEEP 2 ra 13 z 9 D Feeddingitan FM1 rrr 2 Exhaust fan 2 Laser cooling fan FM4 2 Electrical unit cooling fan 5 Gr High speed rotation Low speed rotation 1 Quite mode is set to either 1 through 9 min the operation occurs when A key is pressed An original is placed in the feeder or The copyboard cover or the feeder is opened 2 depending on the setting for quiet mode Figure 3 702 3 140 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON VIII POWER SUPPLY A Outline The machine s DC power is generated by the composite power supply PCB The composite power supply PCB serves as the DC power sup ply a
165. GP200F but are options for other models GP215 GP200 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 5 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING C Inputs to the Major PCBs Composite Poser Supply Circuit around the AC power supply Sorter _ 24V ACC power Main switch RDF supply PCB SW1 System HM System power o Motherboard 12 supply 1210 option i EE supply circuit Noise filter Ir AC heater driver PCB Composite power supply PCB Front door switch Cassette heater H1 Scanning lamp DC controller PCB control HVT Primary charging roller MET AE Developing assembly Transfer guide Static eliminator AW J206 1 Transfer roller T502 NM J206 4 AW J220 3 Fixing assembly t Figure 3 104 3 6 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 3 OPERATIONS AND nputs to and Outputs from the Image Processor PCB 1 3 Image processor PCB J1001 J512 Analog processor lt Checks are not meant for the field PCB DC J111 J509 controller LLL Checks are not meant for the field J5041 J504 5 1 4 detection BD 3 23 BD input PCB J603 J518 J602 J519 Laser driver See p 3 54 PCB Power supply indicator LED LEDON When 1 LED turns ON Turns ON when the main p
166. H AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH AA BBBB DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH lt lt JUD C Press the or key to scan through the levels screen Nos 11 through 20 21 through 30 and 31 through 40 Description Nos 1 through 40 higher the number older Date of occurrence Ex 0801 for August 1 Time of occurrence Ex Time of recovery 1012 for 10 12 Indicates the time the machine entered standby state after jam removal Location 0 copier 1 feeder 2 sorter Jam code high order 2 digits jam type low order 2 digits sensor detecting the jam For details see the next page G Pick up position See the pages that follow HHHHHH Pick up soft counter Paper size Sample Display 01 0821 1430 1435 0 0101 1 06543 000A4 A4 paper jam soft counter reading of the source of paper 1st cassette jam code pre registration sensor delay jam time of recovery 14 35 time of occurrence 14 30 date of occurrence August 21 No 3 162 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING jam code is a 4 digit code the high order 2 digits indicating the type of jam and the low order 2 dig its the sensor which detected the jam
167. IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION I FEATURES 1 Establishes a new set of standards for high quality imaging at a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi equivalent which is the world s first In copier mode the resolution is 600 x 600 dpi when reading and 1200 x 600 dpi when writ ing In fax reception mode the resolution is 600 x 600 dpi hyper genesis smoothing In printer mode the resolution is 1200 x 600 dpi new super smoothing technology 2 Ease of operation and productivity from an integrated design The display is a large LCD touch panel for clear viewing and simple operation The display intensity may be varied The on going fax communication status may be indicated while in copier mode The display indicates the status reception transmission job number fax number party num ber and number of processing pages at intervals of 1 sec 3 Power saving space saving and ozone less considerations for the office and the environment The on demand fixing method warms up the machine quickly so that sleep mode may be made use of without the risk of wasting time The wait time is 8 sec or less at power on on the control panel 8 6 sec or less if the main switch is used The machine is appreciably quieter than the existing models for a better office environment With the help of its power saving design the power consumption is 4 W or less in sleep mode about 1 25 of existing Canon models and 57 W
168. INTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 65 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING D Controlling the Developing Bias 1 Outline Figure 3 506 shows the circuit used to control the developing bias of the composite power supply PCB and the circuit has the following functions Turning ON and OFF the AC component of the developing bias Turning ON and OFF the DC component of the developing bias Controlling the DC component of the developing bias to a specific voltage 3 66 Composite power supply PCB T101 Ki Developing AC drive circuit 45V T101 e _ circui Voltage 5 detection 2 circuit t a a 5 g o S gt o 2 oo 5 25 8 82 5 gt gt 16 Ke c 2 25 o o Y rj lt Q605 CPU k k c 4209 4 9 J209 B9 7209 83 J209 B8 9 5 8 So E ao o 8 29 565 5 a O J102 A1 A7 0 J102 B8 J102 B2 J102 B3 IC101 CPU DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Figure 3 506 Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Turning ON and OFF the DC Component of the Developing Bias The DC component of the developing bias is turned ON and OFF by the DC bias ON OFF
169. Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly 4 Press the service switch with a hex key 5 Press the key twice 6 Press FUNCTION on the screen 4 to highlight then press the OK key 7 Pressthe Page key to bring up the Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Values Registration Screen 4 FUNCTION 07 AD XXXX MF A6R xxx MF A4R xxx MF A4 xxx SIZE xxx x mm Pb Figure 3 1014 8 Set A6 paper in the multifeeder and adjust the side guide to A6R Note A6 is what is obtained by folding A4 paper into four the width is 105 mm 9 When the side guide is adjusted to A6R the VR output value will be indicated under AD xxx on the screen After checking the value press MF A6R on the screen to highlight then press the OK key The value will be stored under MF A6R 10 Likewise set A4R paper in the multifeeder and adjust the side guide to A4R COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 11 Check that the value of AD is indicated then press A4R to highlight and press the OK key The value will be registered under A4R 12 Set A4 paper in the multifeeder and adjust the side guide to A4 13 Check that the value of AD is indicated then press A4 to highlight and press the OK key The value will be stored under A4 14 Press the Reset key twice
170. JAPON 3 91 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Kwasi 2 Moving Up the Pick Up Roller Shaft and Releasing the Lifter Separation Roller sliding out the cassette a Moving Up the Pick Up Roller Shaft and Releasing the Separation Roller Moving Up the Pick Up Roller Shaft When the cassette is slid out the force of the spring rotates the lever 1 The rotation of the lever 1 moves up the pick up roller shaft s that the pick up roller and the cassette will not interfere with each other Spring Pick up roller Cassette Figure 3 617 Moving Up the Pick Up Roller Releasing the Separation Roller A boss is provided on the lever 1 used to push down the separation roller assembly Since the lever 1 rotates when the cassette is slid out the pressure between the separation roller and the feeding roller will be released as shown in Figure 3 618 Bosson the lever 1 Separation roller Cassette Figure 3 618 Releasing the Separation Roller b Releasing the Lifter The lifter is released when the cassette is slid out during standby 3 92 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND D Detecting the Level of Copy Paper The machine checks the level of copy paper inside the cassette and indicates the level in four degrees The level of copy paper inside the cassette is checked in reference to the up movement of the lifter noted wh
171. LTR LTR will be indicated on the LCD If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to LTR LTR will be indicated to stand for Argentine LETTER CST LTRR COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Use it to select the paper name notation for the LTRR size cassette If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to LTR LTRR will be indicated on the LCD If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to LTRR LTRR will be indicated to stand for Argentine LETTER R CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 233 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 COUNTER counter mode Use this mode to find out the numbers of specific operations the machine has performed Each press on the key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen A press on the key will bring back the Menu screen clear the counter reading press the item to highlight then press the key When a dialog box appears asking you whether to clear the counter reading press the OK key to reset the counter reading to 0 6 COUNTER 01 SERV TOTAL1 xxxxx SERV TOTAL2 xxxxx L TOTALxxxxx L MULTI xxxxx CAST1xxxxx L CAST2xxxxx L CASTAxxxxx L CAST5xxxxx CAST6xxxxx bb Indication Description SERV_TOTAL 1 Indicates the servicing total copy count 1 SERV_TOTAL 2 Indicates the serv
172. LY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 83 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Cassette Lifter Operation As long as the cassette is set the cassette lifter is operated as necessary during copying operation so as to maintain the level of the paper stack at a specific position a Lifter Movement during Copying The stack surface is maintained at a specific height by operating the lifter during copying as follows The lifter movement starts when the pick up roller shaft pushes the lifter trigger lever to release the cam The lifter movement ends when the cassette runs out of copy paper 1 As copy paper runs out the movement of the pick up roller increases Pick up rollers Feeding motor Pick up roller shaft QUNM width d Lifter Copy paper Lifter trigger lever Figure 3 605 2 The stack surface lowers further and the pick up roller shaft lowers accordingly causing the pick up roller shaft to push the lifter trigger lever This movement frees the cam so that the cam starts to rotate Feeding roller Pick up roller Pick up roller shaft Lifter trigger lever Figure 3 606 3 84 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 The rotation of the cam moves the lever thereby lifting the lever Lifter gear 20 Figure 3 607
173. MM to remove ze Ed Figure 4 803 2 Remove the four screws and three flat cables then remove the LCD PCB 4 3 Remove the two screws and remove the switch PCB 5 then remove the four screws and the two flat cables and remove the CPU 6 Figure 4 805 Figure 4 804 4 38 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 Installing the ROM DIMM 1 Insert the ROM DIMM into the slot at an 27 B Figure 4 806 2 Shift down the ROM DIMM Shift the ROM DIMM in the direction of the arrow until a click is heard 2 Figure 4 807 3 Install the covers that have been removed connect the power cord to the power outlet and turn ON the main switch 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 39 CHAPTER 5 nmmooume INSTALLATION SELECTING THE SITE 5 1 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 3 Unpackirig uci ces 5 4 Supplying Toner 5 6 Stirring the 5 8 Installing the Drum Cartridge 5 10 Installing the Cassettes 5 14 Installing the Feeder
174. MPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING lt VI COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC BASIC OPERATION 3 1 A Functional Construction 3 1 B Outline of the Electrical Circuitry 3 2 C Inputs to the Major PCBs 3 6 D Main Motor Control PCB 3 16 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 20 A 3 20 B Varying the Reproduction Ratio 3 22 C Sequence of Operations original exposure system 3 22 D Scanner 3 23 E Controlling the Scanning Lamp 3 24 F Identifying the Size of Originals 3 26 IMAGE PROCESSING 3 29 OUN E 3 29 B Analog Image Processing 3 31 C Digital Image Processing 3 33 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 51 A Laser Processing Assembly 3 51 B Generating the BD Signal 3 53 C Laser Driver Circuit 3 54 D Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 3 56 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3 58 A High Voltage Transformer Circuit 3 58 B Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias 3 60 C Controlling the Transfer Charging Roller Bias 3 63 D Controlling the Developing Bias 3 66 E Controlling the Separation Static Eliminator Bias 3 68 F Controlling the Tra
175. N D Extension Mode B Extension Mode Panel initial screen SEPARATION IN ERLIVING SHIFT OVERLAY ORIGINAL MARGIN DESIG SHARPNESS ERASE IMAGE IMAGE CREATION COMB IMAGE SEPARATION MEMORY REC ONE Figure 1 405 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 19 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Er ia B SPECIAL FEATURES Screen SPECIAL FEATURES screen Next screen Remarks TWO PAGE SEPARATION TRANSP INTERLVING Stack bypass Select A4 A4R LTR LTRR SHIFT Center Shift Corner Shift 8 direc tions Keypad Setting SHEET OVERLAY SHEET OVERLAY Requires a duplexing unit BOOK OVERLAY DIF SIZE ORIGINAL Requires an RDF for original THIN SHEET ORIGINAL mix size mode and an ADF for thin paper originals MARGIN Left margin Right margin Top mar gin Bottom margin AREA DESIG Area Desig editor or keypad Framing Blanking Negative Positive Reversal SHARPNESS Soft to Hard 9 steps FRAME ERASE Sheet Frame Erasing Original Frame Erasing Book Frame Erase Binding Erase IMAGE CREATION Mirror Image Image Repeat Negative Positive Reversal Slant image IMAGE COMB 2 1 4 1 2 on 1 Two Sided Requires an RDF PROJECTOR 35mm Negative 35mm Positive 4x 5 Requires a projector Negative 4 x 5 Positive IMAGE SEPARATION 1 on 2 1 on 4 1 on 2
176. N JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 147 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING IX SYSTEM A Basic Operation 1 Outline The machine may be configured as part of a system with any of the following devices FAX Board Printer Board Multi Output Tray C1 Multi Output Tray B2 RDF G1 ADF F1 SCSI Board Network Interface Board FAX Motherboard Board Protocol Controller PCB System Motherboard ncluded in the Extension Kit A1 Included in the Extension Kit B2 3 148 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 Non Stop Copying In this mode specific jobs of the copier fax or printer are executed continuously Specifically a copier image fax image and printer image may be placed alternately on copy paper while it is being fed continuously thereby executing three types of jobs without suspending operation To take advantage of this mode the machine must be equipped with the Multi Output Tray12 B2 or the Multi Output Tray C1 EN ____ Print paper for copier image Print paper for fax image Print paper for printer image 2 2 Conceptual Diagram of Non Stop Copying CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ee 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Feeder a RDF G1 Pick up for the RDF G1 occurs differently between copier function and fax transmission When making copies the bottommost original is picked up
177. NC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 21 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Description SPECIAL FEATURES DIF Size Original You can use originals of different sizes using a feeder The originals may be of different lengths but must be of the same feeding width Thin Sheet Original You may use an ADF when copying thin originals invoice slips etc 35 to 50 g m or less Margin You may move an image to the front or the rear in sub scanning direction by specifying a distance so as to create a margin on the Left Margin left right of the output The binding width may be adjusted between 1 and 20 mm in 1mm Right Margin increments You may select cover only back only or both cover and back Top Margin Bottom Margin Desig You can select an area in a specific image for special processing The X coordinate must be 432 mm or less and Y 297 mm or less Framing Blanking Negative Positive Reversal Sharpness You can emphasize or subdue images You may select one from nine different degrees Select hard for crisp characters and lines or soft for photos Frame Erase You can select from among the following four types of frame erasing D Original Frame Erase 2 Sheet Frame Erase Sheet Frame Bn 7mm Erase 2 5 Original Frame Erase Original Book Frame Erase
178. NC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 1 2 COPYING PROCESS Kw wCw aaaha Fvnn The GP215 GP200 s image formation process consists of the following steps as discussed in sequence Step 1 Pre exposure Step 2 Primary charging AC negative DC Step 3 Laser exposure AC negative DC bias Step 5 Transfer positive DC Step 6 Separation negative DC Step 7 Fixing Step 8 Drum cleaning The photosensitive drum has a layer construc tion the outside is a photoconducting layer of OPC and the inside conductive aluminum sub strate Photoconductive Substrate Figure 2 103 2 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC B Latent Image Formation Block The latent image formation block consists of three steps at the end of which negative charges are left behind in the areas on the drum corre sponding to the white areas of the original and negative charges are removed from the areas on the drum corresponding to the black areas of the original Such images on the drum created by negative charges are not visible to the human eye and are therefore called static images Time t Surface uuu aab potential V Light areas dark areas of originals 500 8 2 areas not exposured by the laser 10007 5 Laser exposure step 3 8 Primary charging step 2 Figure 2 104 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN
179. NER MOTOR DRIVE command LAZER SCANNER MOTOR LOCK signal ONE TOUCH DIAL LOW DETECTION signal LASER DRIVE command MULTIFEEDER CLUTCH DRIVE signal MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH signal MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command MULTIFEED ROLLER SOLENOID DRIVE command PRIMARY CHARGING ROLLER CLEANING SOLENOID DRIVE command PAPER DETECTION signal 1 PAPER DETECTION signal 3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal 4 PAPER DETECTION signal 5 PAPER DETECTION signal 6 PAPER DETECTION signal 7 PRE CONDITIONING EXPOSURE LAMP LIT command RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal REPICK UP ROLLER SECTION SOLENOID DRIVE signal REGIST CLUTCH DRIVE signal DRUM TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal SCANNER HOME POSITION signal SEPARATION STATIC ELIMINATOR ON command SAMPLE HOLD signal SOLENOID DRIVE signal 2 SIDE REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal ANTI CONDENSATION HEATER SWITCH DRIVE command LIGHT INTENSITY SWO LIGHT INTENSITY SW1 TONER EMPTY signal FIXING THERMISTOR 1 signal FIXING THERMISTOR 2 signal UPPER CASETTE PAPER DETECTION signal ONT TOUCH DIAL UP DETECTION signal CASETTE CERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal WASTE TONER DETECTION signal COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON C GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM a Delivery assembly paper sensor 811953 100V ONLY 4209 J214
180. NON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Period Purpose Remarks TNTR1 initial rotation 1 From when the main power switch is turned ON or the front door is opened closed until standby starts Measures the resistance of the drum SLEEP sleep Power saving mode SLEEP 2 When the power switch on the control panel is OFF and the main power switch is ON Fax recep tion is enabled but printer functions are disabled Quick start mode SLEEP 1 When the control panel power switch is OFF and the main power switch is ON Fax reception is enabled and printer func tions are enabled Turns OFF the loads when the machine is not used for a long time such as at night For details on power saving mode and quick start mode see the appropriate descriptions under Power Supply TNTR2 initial rotation 2 From when the Copy Start key is pressed until the scanner starts to move forward Stabilizes the drum sensitivity in prepara tion for copying opera tion Executes shading cor rection SCFW scanner forward While the scanner is moving forward The distance over which the scanner moves for ward varies depending on the selected paper size and reproduction ratio The distance at which the scanner moves forward varies depending on the selected reproduction rat
181. NS AND The GP215 GP200 s AE may be priority on speed default or priority on image quality Here the discussions are on priority on image quality for priority on speed see p 3 32 In priority on image quality the density cor rection curve is varied according to the type of original In priority on image quality the scanner is moved forward to suit the size of the detected original thereby executing full scanning for mea suring the density of the entire original This way the density of the background and the density of the image are measured to classify the original into any of the following three types D Background Type Original Originals which are white or light in density carrying text 2 Reversal Type Original Originals which are colored or light in density carrying light text or reversed text 3 Other Originals Originals with little variation in density e g photos Copy density Copy density A A gt Depending on the type of original one of the following three AE tables is selected to generate a correction table to suit the original for density cor rection You may adjust the priority on image function in service mode 3 see p 3 205 When AE is executed using the ADF or the RDF AE is initiated for each original which is picked up In page separation a signal AE scan is used to check the density of all originals for
182. ON INC eee 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Updating CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Replace the ROM DIMM double inline memory module on the image processor or update it by downloading as discussed Downloading will update the ROM DIMM you must replace the following ROMs to update C103 DC controller PCB C104 DC controller PCB Replacing the ROM DIMM Removing the ROM DIMM Turn off the main power switch Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Remove the copyboard glass lens cover and IP cover While opening the claw of the slot lift the ROM DIMM to remove Figure 3 1021 3 249 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Installing the ROM DIMM b Downloading 1 Insert the ROM DIMM into the slot at an Tools Required angle PC The utility program for upgrading and the new program to be written to the ROM DIMM must have been installed in advance e RS232C cable Downloading Turn off the main power switch Open the front door and remove the connec tor cover for servicing connect the copier to the PC with an RS232C cable Cover Figure 3 1022 2 Shift down the ROM DIMM Shift it down in the direction of the arrow until a click is heard Figu
183. OPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 39 5 lNSTALLATION si 9 Select the appropriate control type as follows 10 Set the control paper size as follows 9 1 Set the control type using the Keypad A1 10 1 Change the control paper size using the DIP Press amp so that FORMAT 1 appears switch on the Copy Data Controller A1 and 9 2 Set the control type number to suit the type the Keypad A1 of copier and the needs of the user by refer To continue to use the existing control paper ring to Table 5 505 go to step v 10 2 Press the IO key to scan through the No of groups Paper size paper sizes OTH however will not appear since it cannot be changed 3000 5 EX 1 1000 One sided 1 SIZE 1 appears two sided 2 Press the C key Mono 3 SIZE 2 4 appears 2 color full color 4 Press the amp key 5 SIZE 3 B4 appears Table 5 505 6 Press the C key 3 A 7 SIZE 4 B5 appears o select 3 for control type 1 FORMAT 1 appears Since the initial set ERI ting is 1 change the control type number 9 SIE 3 B4 appears to 3 10 Press the key Press the 3 key To clear the input value press the C key 11 SIZE 2 A4 appears and try again EX2 Changing B4 to LGL for Control Paper
184. PB DFPO SPLAY 05 gt gt gt gt DFExPA DFExPB XXXXXXXX DFExPO xxxxxxxx X X ok 2 O DISPLAY 05 DF P4 DXXXXXXXX gt XXXXXXXX gt XXXXXXXX 1 gt XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX DXXXXXXXX DXXXXXXXX DF ExPA DF ExPB DF xxxxxxxx 44 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Ports for ADF Indicated when an ADF is connected C DL CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 187 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gw a Input Output Ports of the RDF 1 2 Address Indication DFP4 output O O OO N O stopper plate solenoid SL1 paper deflecting plate solenoid SL3 stamping solenoid SL4 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used pick up roller sensor S5 delivery sensor 1 S6 pick up sensor S7 Not used PCB internal signal PCB internal signal Not used Not used paper present paper present paper present original sensor S1 registration sensor S3 original width detecting VR Not used reversal sensor S8 delivery sensor 2 S12 original tray paper sensor LED1 registration s
185. PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 165 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Error Alarm Indication 4th screen 1 DISPLAY 03 BODY DF ST ERR xx XX ALRM xx L b C Description See the descriptions Table7 103 for self diagnosis E code See the table below for the nature of alarm Refers to the copier Refers to the feeder ADF RDF Refers to the sorter Copier Related Alarm Description Replace the drum unit 3 166 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ALARM ADF Fault Original sensor PI2 Registration sensor PI7 Original length sensor S Sensor Condition 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Separation delay 2 Both the original sensor 1 and the registration sen sor 2 do not turn on within 2 sec after the main motor M1 has turned on Separation Both the original sensor PI1 and the registration sen sor 2 do not turn ON 2 sec after the main motor M1 has turned ON 1st original only Different number of originals after jam removal The last original is detected before feeding the number of originals identified by the jam recovery mechanism Original pulled The original sensor 1 is OFF after pick up opera tion other than the last o
186. Pedestal Sensor Clutch Solenoid Figure 3 801 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 142 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Outline of Power Supply in SLEEP 1 quick start mode Printer Network Board Board Composite power supply PCB Lamp regulator Main power Front door Switch switch 7 24Vu power supply gt 4 gt System Motherboard 47 7V power Supply supply circuit 15 power DC 15V Laser driver PCB supply P DC 5V DC 7V A power Image FAX Sippy processor DC 12V Motherboard 5V power PCB Supply Analog processor PCB 0 15 a T DC 12V Laser scanner motor driver PCB Control panel DC 24Vu Control panel power switch ON signal mm Main motor driver PCB DC 24VR Multi Output Tray B2 RF Control panel power supply switch DC controller PCB DC 24Vu DC 24VR DC 15V DC 12V DC 5V DC loads ADF Multi Output Tray C1 Pedestal Sensor Clutch Solenoid Power is not supplied to shaded units Figure 3 802 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 143 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Ou
187. Replace x Lubricate Inspect Interval Remarks 100 000 copies Scanner drive Scanner rail Lubricant assembly x Feeding assembly Feeding belt Feeding assembly base Transfer guide Optical assembly Scanning lamp reflecting plate No 1 through No 3 mirrors Lens Original size sensor PIP P b b b b Dust proofing glass Developing Developing roll assembly gt Fixing assembly Fixing assembly inlet guide Lower separation claw 6 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON om COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX GENERAL TIMING CHART A 1 SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS A 2 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 3 DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 7 ANALOG PROCESSOR CIRCUIT LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 24 PICK UP UNIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 26 CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ene A 27 FIXING DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 28 COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ene A 29 LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS A 37 SOLVENTS OILS A 38 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A GENERAL TIMING CHART copier mode A4 cassette 1 3 copies General Timing Chart
188. SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR 6 Delivery sensor jam check 7 Delivery sensor PS13 E Error Main motor M1 1 Figure 3 661 Sequence for Delivery Delay Jams 3 134 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 3 OPERATIONS AND g Delivery Sensor Stationary Jams A stationary jam will be identified if copy paper does not move through the delivery sensor within a spe cific period of time after the delivery paper sensor PS13 has turned ON Jam message SCFW SCRV LSTR Delivery sensor Note 1 Note 1 PS13 8 Delivery sensor jam check N Normal Error Main motor M1 Y Note 1 The distance varies according to the length of copy paper Figure 3 662 Sequence for Delivery Sensor Stationary Jams r Note The distance varies according to the length of copy paper COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 135 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING h Lower Feeding Assembly Inlet Sensor Delay Jam overlay copying A delay jam will be identified if copy paper does not reach the lower feeding assembly inlet sensor PS12 within a specific period of time after it has moved past the fixing rear paper sensor 57 Fixing paper sensor PS7 Jam message V SCFW SCRV
189. SURE to highlight and press the OK key The scanner makes 13 scans After executing DENSITY MEASURE check to make sure that the settings under A B and D are as specified Insert PD 200PWM 40 lt B lt 40 20 lt lt 50 0 lt D lt 8 20 lt lt 60 600PWM 4 70 lt B lt 20 0 lt D lt 8 If the settings are as specified press SET to highlight then press the OK key The above ends PD auto matic density adjustment execute 200PWM density automatic adjustment Face down i e the printed side at the bottom COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 27 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Press the key to turn pages to the 200PWM Density Automatic Adjustment screen Perform 200PWM density auto matic adjustment Work as shown for PD density adjustment 4 FUNCTION 05 200PWM PRINT START WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY SANPLING OK DATA SET A xxx D xxx XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX MULTI 0 gt CASSETTE1 A4 1 CASSETTE2 A4 1 JC Press the key to turn pages to the 600PWM Density Automatic Adjustment screen Perform 600PWM density auto matic adjustment Work as shown for PD density adjustment 4 FUNCTION 06 600PWM PRINT START WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY S
190. Set the table below for level 1 classification of the jam codes Jam code FF High order 2 digits Low order 2 digits delay pre registration sensor PS5 stationary vertical path sensor PS8 residual at power on vertical path sensor pedestal Q1603 fixing delivery sensor PS7 delivery sensor PS13 delivery tray 2 paper sensor multi tray 3 PS17 delivery tray 3 paper sensor multi tray 3 PS 18 Multitray 3 inlet sensor PS12 re pick up paper sensor PS11 front door right door pedestal right door 00 multi tray 12 feeder See p 7 51 Pick Up Location Codes Pick up location Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette 5 Cassette 6 Multifeeder Two sided overlay re pick up COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 163 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING List of Jam Codes copier related Sensor Pre registration Vertical path Pedestal vertical Fixing delivery sensor PS5 sensor PS8 path sensor sensor PS7 Low Q1603 order Type N order ode 01 02 03 32 of jam dode Delay 01 0101 0102 0103 0132 Stationary 02 0201 0202 0203 0232 Residual 10 1001 1002 1003 1032 Sensor Delivery sensor PS13 Multitray 3 deliv ery tray 2 paper sensor PS17 Multi tray 3 delivery tray 3 paper sensor PS18 Multitray 3 inlet senso
191. T 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING c Scanner Board The Scanner Board reads images read by the GP215 GP200 for transmission to the host computer through a SCSI interface and it has the following specifications Interface SCSI II Maximum original size 297 x 420 11 17 279x432mm reading depends on size of memory Scanner resolution 600dpi Reading mode 1 bit binary ED 4 bit multiple value 16 gradations 8 bit multiple value 256 gradations Resolutions COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2400dpi to 40dpi SCSI Board SE 2 0 Video signal memory S MB SCSI 600 dpi Binary Expansion Multiple value 167 256 ultiple value memory SMB CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 153 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING C Flow of Image Signals 1 Flow of Image Signals from the Printer Board The PDL data from the host computer is processed into printing images on the Printer Board and sent to the Protocol Controller PCB as image signals The image signals move through the Protocol Controller PCB to reach the CORE IP Board After res olution conversion the image signals move to the Image processor PCB for printing
192. TA SET A xxx B xxx XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX MULTI 0 gt CASSETTE1 4 1 CASSETTE2 4 1 442055 Item Description Reference page 600PWM density auto correc 1 Press 600PWM PRINT to highlight and press tion the Copy Start key A 15 gradation test pattern will be generated 2 Place a blank sheet of paper whitest of all used by the user no color copy paper allowed on the copyboard glass press WHITE MEASURE to highlight and press the OK key The scanner makes a single scan 3 Replace the paper with the test pattern generated previously press DENSITY MEASURE to high light and press the OK key Printed side down 4 Check the value of A B and D Insert 5 If the values as indicated press DATA SET to highlight and press the OK key COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 213 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7 Registering the Multifeeder Paper Width 4 FUNCTION 07 gt AD MF A6R xxx 4 xxx 4 SIZE mm C Item Description Reference page Multifeeder paper width basic 1 Place A6R sheet in the multifeeder and See P 2 15 value registration adjust the side guide to 6 is what you obtain folding A4 into four with its width being 105 mm
193. TER 7 ACC 8 FAX PP C X Figure 3 1017 Press FUNCTION on the Menu screen 4 an press the OK key Press the Page key to bring up the Shading screen 12 the screen 8 FUNCTION 12 AUTO SHEADING START OK Now WB H WP H LAMP H GDA1 H GD2 H CDA4 H 5 H D ODD H D EVN H C Figure 3 1018 Place five to ten standard blank sheets of paper FY9 3004 on the copyboard glass Copyboard glass Figure 3 1019 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Press AUTO SHADING START on the LCD to highlight then press the OK key shading auto correction will be executed 9 A beep will be sounded while the lamp is being adjusted with the screen indicating LEVEL press the OK key when the beep stops f no beep is heard remove the rear cover and turn VR1 on the DC controller PCB until a beep is heard then press the OK key If no beep is heard after turning VR1 fully clockwise press the OK key while keeping VR1 turned fully clockwise 4 FUNCTION 12 R amp D SHEADING START OK CANCEL Now LAMP LEVEL WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH GDA1 GD2 xxH CDA4 xxH ADDA5 xxH D ODD xxH D EVN xxH 44 gt C Figure 3 1020 10 In a while Now END will appear on the screen indicating the end of shading auto correction COPYRIGHT 1996 CAN
194. TH1 located at the center of the heater The fixing heater is con trolled to a specific temperature at all times A sub thermistor TH2 is provided at the end of the fixing heater to monitor the temperature of the area which remains free of contact with paper when small size paper is moved through the fixing assembly thereby preventing overheating The fixing cleaning roller is made of aluminum and is kept in contact with the lower fixing roller to remove toner from the lower fixing roller It also serves to discharge heat from the lower fixing roller The metal core of the lower fixing assembly is given a positive bias to prevent offset of toner to the fixing film COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC J Drum Cleaning Cleaning blade Blade Scoop up sheet Figure 2 115 The toner remaining on the drum surface is scraped by the cleaning blade in preparation for the next copy When scraped off the drum surface the toner is collected by the scoop up sheet and is forwarded to the rear by the blade CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 7 2 COPYING PROCESS Il AUXILIARY PROCESS 1 Delivery Static Eliminator Copy paper immediately prior to delivery holds residual charges from transfer and a static elimi nator grounded brush is provided at the delivery slot to remove such charges 2 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN I
195. TIONS A 2 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 3 DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 7 ANALOG PROCESSOR CIRCUIT LASER DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 24 PICK UP UNIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 26 CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION CIRCUIT A 27 FIXING DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 28 COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 29 LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS A 37 SOLVENT S OILS A 38 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON V CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION IV COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC FEATURES eiat reed 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS a 1 2 NAMES OF PARTS 1 8 A External View 1 8 B Cross Section 1 10 C Arrangement of Extension Boards 1 12 1 13 A Turning On the Power Switches 1 13 V VI B Control 1 14 C Basic 1 16 D Extension 1 19 E Custom Common Settings 1 25 ROUTINE WORK BY THE USER 1 29 iicet titt es 1 30 A Laser Beams 1 30 B Safety of 1 81 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED
196. U JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC A 26 APPENDIX H CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC W1704 CS4 4 o o rn J1700 CS3 2 oe Of J1700 581702 CS2 o J1700 SW1701 CS1 4 0 0 14700 SW1700 CSO 5 OO J1700 6 51700 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 27 APPENDIX I FIXING DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 4 HRD 811901 O J1901 BA a R39 o J1901 3190 my N o o ove 811902 O e J1901 03904 1904 YK O J1902 iiii i ii G a e mom o 42 28 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON APPENDIX J COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 1 8 7v BASE 24 6 24 24 0 6 24V0N 3 A FUL FLH HVH 100 445v L HLFLS 230V H A137 R13 45V COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 29 qu gt me E 5222 222 120M4 5 8 XOT NAVZ 1938 tov B Bus LIWIAD NOAP
197. V 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 7 5 INSTALLATION C Stirring the Toner Work Remarks Insert the handle of the static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing lever assembly and lock the fixing assembly Separation static eliminator cleaning brush Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly and turn ON the door switch Door switch actuator Connect the power plug to the The power outlet must be rated as specified power outlet Turn on the main power switch 17 Main power switch 5 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Execute service mode as follows Toner Stir screen 1 Press the service switch PT 2 Check to make sure that TONER SD is indicated in the upper left START OK of the control panel LCD STOP OK then press the key twice 3 Press FUCNTION 4 toe select then press the OK key 4 Press the key to turn pages to the Toner Stirring Screen 5 Press START on the EC J pur J Jl OK screen then press the OK key The toner stirring operation takes 240 sec 4 min and Toner stirring starts the operation will stop automatically Install the copy tray while the toner is being stirred COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP2
198. W5 on the Copy Data Controller to ON LED1 LED2 LED3 Sw2 2 2 SW3 LED4 LED5 LED6 lt 6 JA1 JC8 H LLIJA2 JB1 JC9 IPC SW4 Figure 5 513 6 Connect the connector 3 of the Keypad A1 to the connector J3 4 of the Coy Data Controller A1 Figure 5 514 5 38 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 7 Press the switch SW2 on the Copy Data Controller A1 to start service mode SW2 LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 69 69 0 amp 69 LED4 LED5 z 81 8 JA n 382 2 55 cpu 208 J5 6 1 6 1 WA Wuna iudi SW1 ON sws ON Figure 5 515 8 Make settings as follows 8 1 Select card ID input using the Keypad A1 Initially card input 8 2 To change from card input to ID input per form the following using the Keypad A1 To change from ID input to card input requires the Card Reader A1 go to 8 4 MANAGE CARD will be indicated 8 3 Press the 2 key and press the ENT key will be indicated 8 4 To change to card input press the 1 key after MANAGE ID has appeared then press the ENT key MANAGE CARD will appear
199. YRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 1 5 INSTALLATION Space Needed for Servicing Work 170 cm min a a Q m ae 2 yaq 180 cm min 170 cm min 210 cm min K Uc t 6 5 170 cm min 200 cm min 5 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Il UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION Bringing in a piece of metal from a cold to warm place can cause droplets of water to form on its sur face This phenomenon is called condensation and a copier suffering from condensation can generate blank copies If the copier has been just moved from a cold place leave it alone at least for one hour without unpack ing it so that it will become used to the site temperature COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 3 5 INSTALLATION A Unpacking Work Remarks Unpack the machine and remove the plastic sheets f you are installing the pedestal unpack it as well Hold the grips of the machine and lift and place the machine on the pedestal Work in a group of two The figures on the right show a machine with an RDF Open the corrugated cardboard C
200. a pulse signal used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp to a specific level by varying the duty ratio based on the results of shading automatic correction exe cuted in service mode according to the output of the scanning lamp intensity sensor 5 Detecting Errors If the scanning lamp fails to turn ON in the presence of the lamp ON signal the scanning lamp ON circuit detects the condition to generate the error detection signal PRTCT to the CPU In response the CPU generates the scanning lamp OFF signal FLOFF without waiting for a command from the DC controller CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 25 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING F Identifying the Size of Originals 1 Outline The original size detection mechanism of the copier or the feeder is used as necessary to detect the size of an original placed on the copy board or in the feeder The size data obtained by this mechanism is used for the following Auto paper selection Auto ratio selection AB Configuration Y wa Sensor 0 Sensbr 1 CUM Sensor2B5 A i B4 Rcx lb 57 Inch Configuration Sensor 0 Sensor 1 Figure 3 207 arrangement of original sensors 3 26 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www sCTs lt ssm 3 OPERATIONS AND
201. ace with the pulley click 3 Set the mirror positioning tool Se p 4 11 4 Setthe cable as shown 3 2 5 6 5 Loosen and then tighten the set screw 7 of the drive pulley so that the tension of the scanner cables is even throughout 6 Fix the No 1 mirror mount and the scanner cable metal fixing in place 8 7 Fix the cable spring stay in place so that the spring length is 32 1 mm Loosen the set screw so that the pulley is free to rotate Set screws Put the steel ball into the pulley hole Wind it 3 5 times toward the inside and 6times Pulley clip toward the outside then snap on the pulley clip Set the mirror positioning tool Steel ball 9 p L ESL 321mm Figure 4 305 4 10 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 4 Setting the Mirror Positioning Tool Use the mirror positioning tool FY9 3009 040 by changing its pin arrangement for the machine Refer to the figures for the correct order D and 3 indicate the positions of the pins and 8 and O indicate the pins Figure 4 306 FY9 3009 040 Figure 4 307 arranged for the front of the machine 1 Relocate the pins of the mirror positioning tool so that it may be used for the machine Attach the longest pin to 1
202. al direction to press the waste toner sensor lever there by causing the waste toner sensor PS10 to turn ON and OFF alternately The DC controller PCB monitors the output of the waste toner sensor for about 8 sec after the main motor turns ON The waste toner case is assumed to be full of waste toner when the output of the waste toner sensor is detected ten times or more during the period Upon detection the Waste Toner Case Full message will be indicated during standby Waste toner sensor PS10 Waste toner feeding blade EE d i sssi Main motor Cleaner housing Coupling i wass E Photo sensitive drum Figure 3 511 conceptual diagram 3 72 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING H Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 1 Outline The GP215 GP200 is equipped with a mechanism which automatically cleans the primary charging roller The primary charging roller cleaning solenoid SL1 is turned ON while the primary charging roller is rotating to butt the cleaning pad against the primary charging roller while at the same time the primary charging roller is moved back and forth in the axial direction of the primary charging roller This cleaning is executed under the following
203. al registration paper J114 B2 detection PS14 bin 3 tray position detection J104 7 lower feeding assem bly present lower feeding assembly ID lower feeding assem bly inlet present lower feeding assembly inlet Multitray 3 connected unit ID Multitray 3 ID Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used rotates rotates main motor drive J114 B6 laser scanner motor drive J112 7 registration clutch drive J114 B11 multifeeder pick up clutch J114 B9 vertical path roller clutch J114 A4 developing clutch J113 B14 pick up roller DOWN solenoid J114 A5 multifeeder holding plate releasing solenoid J114 B13 counter 1 drive J107 B4 counter 2 drive J107 B6 cassette pedestal communica tion signal J106 11 bin 3 shift tray drive J104 8 re pick up paper deflecting plate solenoid J103 5 paper deflecting plate 2 sole noid J104 9 delivery assembly paper deflecting plate solenoid J105 A5 bin 3 flapper solenoid J104 10 52522522260 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 mk 4 ok N pick up motor drive J114 A6 pick up motor drive J114 A7 pick up motor drive J114 A8 pick up motor drive J114 A9 fixing film drive J109 10 fixing film drive J109 11 fixing film drive J109 12 fixing film drive J109 13 horizontal registration drive J115 3 horizontal registration drive J115 4 horizontal registration drive J115 5 horizontal registration drive J115 6 feeding fan drive J107 A8 exhaust fan 1 drive J107
204. amp LED100 Figure 3 513 DC Controller PCB 3 74 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Status Indications by Flashing LED Flashing intervals Classification 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Description Intervals of 0 5 sec Normal The composite power supply PCB is operating normally Intervals of 2 sec 2sec 2sec Overcurrent The composite power supply PCB has detected an overcurrent because of trapped wiring or an error in a load in relation to 24VR or 24VU output Intervals of 3 sec 3sec Low voltage control error in standby The difference between the setting for 24VR output and the control value in standby is larger than specified Upon detection error data is sent to the DC controller PCB E803 will be indicated on the control panel Intervals of 5 sec 5sec 5sec Error in the commu nication with the DC controller PCB An error has occurred in the commu nication between the DC controller PCB and the composite power supply PCB and the communication data is not renewed for 8 sec or more However LED100 on the DC controller may not flash or turn ON at times E191 will be indicated on the con trol panel
205. ansfer charging roller is corrected The reference bias is applied each time the Copy Start key is pressed thereby correcting the voltage level d Sheet to Sheet Distance In continuous copying the bias value is decreased so as to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer charging roller between sheets of copy paper Main power Control power Copy Start switch ON switch key ON SLEEP STBY INTR SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY 2 gt gt Main motor 1 E Se Cleaning bias m 2 Reference bias 2 Sheet to sheet bias e m 2 Transfer bias Figure 3 505 3 64 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND 2 Controlling the Transfer Charging Roller Bias The transfer charging roller bias is controlled by the CPU Q605 on the composite power sup ply PCB according to instructions from the DC controller PCB a Switching between Bias Types The aforementioned bias types are switched based on combinations of the transfer output mode 0 HVTMO and the transfer output mode 1 1 from the DC controller PCB See Table 3 501 Bias type Cleaning bias Transfer bias Reference bias Sheet to sheet bias Table 3 501 b Turning ON and OFF the Cleaning Bias When the cleaning bias drive signal TREVON
206. ard 2 System Power Supply 8 CORE IP Board Protocol Controller Board 4 FAX Motherboard 9 Network Interface Board 5 Printer board G3FAX board 1 12 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION IV OPERATION A Turning On the Power Switches The machine offers two power switches main power switch and control panel power switch You must first turn on the main power switch and then the control panel switch whenever you are turn ing on both switches Figure 1 401 D Control panel power switch 2 Main power switch Main power supply lamp COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 13 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B Control Panel E co co c3 JC JC co C Reset CCC c co co co Guide J J J cocco User mode 9 Figure 1 402 CD Copier key 2 Fax key 8 Extension key Keypad 4 Clean key Interrupt key 5 Stop key 9 User mode key 6 Start key Guide key 47 Reset key If for North America PRINT 2 Power supply lamp 1 14 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B Function Ba
207. as instructed Using Service Mode 1 Open the front door and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly then insert the handle of the static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing assembly 2 Press the service switch 3 Press the key twice and press 1 DISPALY 2 to highlight then press the OK key 4 Press the Page key to select the screen showing the desired address PS1 PS2 PS3 Scanner home posi tion sensor SCHP Fixing film sensor FFD Copyboard cover open closed sensor CBCC Tester probe J107 A2 J109 3 J113 B9 Service mode DC PA0 bit0 DC PAO bit1 Make checks nor mal if as indicated Move the scanner from home position during standby Move the detecting lever by hand dur ing standby Open close the copyboard cover dur ing standby The scan ner is at home position The scan ner is not at home position The light blocking plate is present The light blocking plate is absent The copy board cover is closed The copy board cover is opened Display reading 1 0 1 0 Tester reading 3 254 about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 54 PS5 PS6
208. asic Registration The Basic Registration Setting screen appears Press the Y key to open the 2 3 screen then press Selecting Line Type Select the appropriate telephone line type 20 pps and press the OK key 10 pps Touch tone Press the Close key several times to return to the Standard screen 5 20 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 5 INSTALLATION 4 Adjusting the Transmission Level for model FAX function only Work Remarks Start FAX service mode Starting FAX Service Mode 1 Check to make sure that the handle of the separation static eliminator cleaning brush is inserted into the fixing assembly releasing assembly In addition make sure that the door switch actuator is inserted into the door switch assembly Push the service switch with a hex key Press the key twice The Service Mode Menu screen will appear Press 8 FAX on the screen and press the OK key The Menu screen will appear Press 2 MENU on the Menu screen and press the OK key Press ATT P on the screen to open the Value Input screen Press the appropriate item to highlight and enter the appropriate value using the key pad then press the OK key To continue on to adjust NL go to step 3 of NL adjustment To not continue on to adjust NL press the Cancel key and press the Reset key twice to end service
209. assettes upper lower and the multifeeder Copy paper from any of the cassettes or the multifeeder is controlled by the registration roller so that its leading edge matches the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum the paper is then sent to the copy tray As many as nine sensors are used to monitor the movement of copy paper Seven sensors are used to detect jams Figure 3 601 shows the arrangement of sensors electrical input parts and Figure 3 602 shows the arrangement of motors as well as clutches and solenoids electrical output parts The figures do not cover the cassette drive system Notation Name Signal Jack PS4 Multifeeder paper sensor MFPD J113 A11 PS5 Pre registration paper sensor PDP1 J113 A5 PS7 Fixing rear paper sensor J109 6 Q1604 Upper cassette paper sensor UCSPD J114 A10 Q1605 Lower cassette paper sensor LCSPD J114 A11 PS8 Vertical path paper sensor 4 J113 A2 PS11 Re pick up front paper sensor PDP5 J103 2 PS12 Lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor PDP6 J105 B2 PS13 Delivery sensor PDP7 J105 A2 Jack in the signal line on the DC controller PCB Table 3 601 List of Pick Up Feeding System Sensors 3 76 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Photosensitive drum Regiatration roller PS7 Feeding Multifeeder pick up roller y _ 9 CR a Fig as
210. at the pedestal s pin will slide off the holes Work in a group of two Lower the copier on the floor or on a desk 5 30 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION IV INSTALLING THE 2 Before Installation the Control CONTROL CARD V 1 Ee the control card slot face plate 1 Caution Check to make sure that the MEMORY TX RX indicator is OFF before turning OFF the main power switch 1 Removing the Control Panel 1 Remove the following so that the inside cover may be removed Front door Fixing cover Drum unit Release the developing assem bly Feeding assembly lever Registration roller knob Upper cassette 2 Remove the five screws and remove the inside cover 3 Remove the following so that the control panel may be removed Fixing controller PCB 1 screw Magnet plate from control panel top 1 Screw RS232C connector 1 screw 4 Remove the four screws and disconnect the four connectors then remove the control Figure 5 401 panel and turn it over 2 Remove the screw from the face plate 2 Figure 5 402 3 Remove the protection sheet from the display of the Control Card V COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 31 5 INSTALLATION 3 Installing the Control Card 2 Install the grounding wire 4 of the
211. ating that the adjustment is over press the Reset key twice to leave service mode The foregoing adjustment is the same as using SW3 on the RF controller PCB S BCLN T Use it to execute cleaning 1 Press the appropriate item 5 BCLN T or of the separation belt for 5 B to highlight upper separation 2 Set a sheet of copy paper whose center has been moistened with alcohol on the RDF s tray 3 Press the OK key The sheet of copy paper will be picked up and the separation belt will be rotated idly 4 Press the OK key to end the operation 5 Open the RF s top cover and remove the sheet of copy paper Then close the RF s top cover The foregoing adjustment is the same as using bit 6 of DIPS1 on the RF controller PCB S BCLN B Use it to clean the separa tion belt for lower separa tion 3 240 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Adjusting the ADF This screen is effective only when an ADF is installed Item 7 ACC 03 ADF DOC STOP x LA SPEED x Function Description DOC_STOP Use it to adjust the origi Compare copies made with an original on the nal stop position for the copyboard glass and copies made using the ADF ADF use this item so that the leading edge registration is correct This is the same as adjusting the original leading edge regist
212. black a lower setting on the other hand will decrease black between 0 and 40 with the default at 20 Figure 3 1027 Slide level dividing white area background and black area text may be changed under AE_ SLOP of ADJUST in service mode 3 CIC Lower Higher setting Degree g g White Higher E setting r i Original g Lower setting density histogram Output mE May be adjusted i _ under AE LIGHT Signal level of ADJUST in Dark 3 Light service mode 3 occ A _ white Black EM Dark Light black Input white Text Background 4 White White May be adjusted Lower under AE DARK AE table Output setting of ADJUST in 2 service mode 3 Higher setting Black 2 Dark Light Dark Light black Input white black Input white Figure 3 1027 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 253 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gw 8 Checking the Photointerrupters The photointerrupters may be checked either using a conventional tester or using service mode 1 Using a Tester 1 Set the tester range to 12 VDC 2 Connect the tester probe to GND 0 VDC of the DC controller PCB 3 Make checks
213. charging roller The GP215 GP200 uses negative transfer voltage during initial rotation and last rotation to return any such toner charged to a nega tive potential and sticking to the transfer roller to the photosensitive drum Transfer roller 2 112 H Separation step 6 Transfer roller 1 Static eliminator 2 113 GP215 200 takes advantage of the rigidi ty of copy paper to separate paper from the drum curvature separation Since thin paper has little rigidity it tends to remain wrapping on the drum To prevent such a problem a negative voltage is applied to the separation static eliminator thereby weakening the static bond between drum and copy paper for better separation 2 6 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON E 2 COPYING PROCESS l Fixing step 7 Main thermistor TH1 Sub thermistor TH2 Fixing film Fixing heater Lower fixing roller Fixing cleaning roller Copy paper Figure 2 114 After transfer the copy paper is moved through the fixing film and the lower fixing roller so that the toner image will be fused into the fibers of the paper The fixing heater is a plane shaped heater it serves to eliminate warm up time by heating the area of contact with the fixing film The temperature of the fixing heater is moni tored by the main thermistor
214. ching between AB and Inch configurations Based on the detected size of copy paper the machine determines the distance over which to move the scanner and the area of laser exposure Switch Figure 3 623 AB Inch Configuration Switch COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 95 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gri 2 Paper Sizes The size of copy paper is detected by the machine s CPU in reference to the dial on the cassette set by the user Figure 3 624 shows the rotary label attached to the dial and Table 3 608 shows the sizes of copy paper which may be used for the machine Main scanning Sub scanning direction mm direction mm AB A4 210 148 A5R 148 210 A4 297 210 210 297 A3 297 420 B5 257 182 B5R 182 257 B4 257 364 U1 FLSO 216 330 OFICIO 216 317 A OFI 220 340 E OFI 220 320 216 355 220 340 210 330 206 337 Set by user Set by user Set by user Set by user Set by user Set by user 216 140 140 216 279 216 280 220 216 279 220 280 216 356 279 432 267 203 203 267 203 330 268 190 190 268 Set by user Set by user Set by user Set by user Set by user Set by user Configuration Cassette Table 3 606 Copy Sizes 3 96 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
215. ck up front paper sensor J103 2 Lower feeding assembly inlet sensor J105 B2 Delivery assembly paper sensor J105 A2 Jack in the signal line on the DC controller PCB Table 3 614 3 130 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Types The microprocessor identifies jams in the following conditions a Delay Jam Copy paper does not reach the appropriate sensor within a specific period of time i e the sensor does not turn ON b Stationary Jams Copy paper does not move past the appropriate sensor within a specific period of time after the sen sor detected the paper i e the sensor does not turn OFF c Residual Jam Paper remains over a sensor at power ON i e the sensor detects paper r Note A jam will be identified if the front door right door or delivery door is opened during copying or when the cassette is slid out 3 Sequence of Operations a Pick Up Delay Jam A delay jam will be identified if copy paper does not reach the vertical path paper sensor PS8 within a specific period of time after the vertical path clutch CL3 has turned ON Pick up of Copy Start Key ON 2ndcopy Jam message V V V INTR C Pick up solenoid SL2 t Vertical path clutch CL3 Jam check Vertical path paper Normal Error
216. conditions During last rotation after the end of copying operation when making 50 or more copies continuous ly During last rotation when the cumulative number of copies reaches 500 or more when making 50 copies or less When adjustment cleaning is executed in user mode to clean the roller in this case a cleaning bias is applied to the transfer charging roller and the roller is cleaned at the same time SL1 ON S y Back and forth movement Primary charging roller Cleaning pad 6 Photosensitive drum Figure 3 512 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 73 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING l Detecting Errors on the Composite Power Supply PCB The composite power supply PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic function which checks for an error in the output of the PCB and its communication with the DC controller PCB The results of detection are indicated by changing the intervals at which LED100 on the DC controller PCB flash See p 3 75 At the same time the results are sent to the image processor PCB to indicate an error code on the con trol panel When an E coded is indicated the machine may be reset by turning ON and OFF the main power sup ply As described later errors which cause the scanning lamp are also checked by this detection mecha nism Resetting the machine after such errors requires replacement of the scanning l
217. copi er power supply PCB 4 Shading auto cor rection 4 PD density auto correction 4 200 density auto correction 4 600PWM density auto correction 1 Replace the image processor PCB 2 Execute RAM clear in ser vice mode 4 3 Start service mode 3 and enter the value recorded on the service label 4 Enter the values recorded on the image processor PCB under the appropriate item 3 as follows 600PWM MIN 600PWM MAX 200PWM MIN 200PWM MAX 5 Execute shading auto correc tion in service mode 4 6 Execute PD density auto cor rection 200PWM density auto correction and 600PWM density auto cor rection in service mode 7 Enter settings values under OPTION 5 and in user mode CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Service mode Steps Composite power supply PCB Laser scanner unit Laser unit 9 Enter the values recorded on the label 4 Shading auto correction 4 PD density auto correc tion 4 200PWM density auto correction 4 600PWM density auto correction 1 Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the composite power supply PCB under the appropriate items on the 3rd page in ser vice mode 3 2 Execute shading auto cor rection in service mode 4 3 Execute PD density auto correction
218. copy and 20 mm copying on 2nd side right the figures assume a page separation copying on 1st side let shift of 5 mm two sided copy copying on 2nd side right one sided original copying on 1st side overlay copy copying on 2nd side two sided original copying on 1st side overlay copy copying on 2nd side page separation copying on 1st side left overlay copy copying on 2nd side right Copy paper Image area when copying on 1st side Image area when copying on 2nd side D area Erased by blank exposure lamp Drum Drum La nage on drum A mage on drum La Copy paper ahead lt 8 Copy paper behind of image on drum image on drum COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 103 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING H Making Overlay Copies 1 Outline Figure 3 628 1 shows the paper path used to make overlay copies Copy paper that has moved through the fixing assembly is sent to the lower feeding assembly by the movement of the paper deflecting plate In the lower feeding assembly the set back roller puts the incom ing sheet in a staggered stack and waits for the next sheet When picked up from this stack re pick up copy paper is discharged by the movement of the paper deflecting plate 1 The paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 turns ON
219. cord any new settings if you made changes in the field Further you must enter the settings recorded on the label whenever you have cleared the RAM If you replaced the image processor PCB or the composite power supply PCB be sure to enter the set tings recorded on the respective label You need not do so when you have replaced only the ROM MF A6R DVLP DC OFST FILM LANK MF A4R H ADJ ABC TBL MF A4 V ADJ STRD ADJ PRI DC IMG REGIST PPR PRI DC on IMG RSIDE SENSHP W PLT DVLP DC IMG PVE OFST TRNS 1 DVLP DC on IMG IC DENS TRNS 2TS TRNS IMG CST LOOP 201 TRNS on IMG MF LOOP PRI AC IMG DENS ADJ PRI AC on IMG ADJ S AGS GAIN LASER OFF AGS OFST PWN 600 MIN PRI DC OFST PWM 600 MAX PRI AC OFST1 PWM 200 MIN PRI AC OFST2 PWM 200 MAX TRNS OFST AE SLOP FL OFST RESIST Figure 3 1003 Service Label attached behind the front door PeL APVC GAIN P6H APVC OFST P2L PDC OFST P2H OFST1 Figure 3 1004 Service Label attached to the image proces sor PCB 3 160 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC PAC OFST2 ATVC OFST FL OFST DDC OFST Figure 3 1005 Service Label attached to the composite power supply PCB CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON
220. correc tion in service mode 4 After replacing the composite power supply PCB After replacing the laser unit After replacing the CCD unit After replacing the analog processor PCB Work Open the front door and insert the handle of the separation static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing opening Separation static eliminator cleaning brush Figure 3 1006 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 3 4 5 6 Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly Push the service switch with a hex key will be indicated in the upper left corner of the LCD Press the key twice The Service Mode Menu screen will appear SERVICE MODE gt 1 DISPLAY 2 VO DISPLAY 3 ADJUST 4 FUNCTION 55 OPTION 6 COUNTER 7 ACC 8 FAX C Figure 3 1007 Press FUCNTION 4 on the Menu screen to highlight then press the OK key Press the Page key to bring up the Shading screen 3rd screen 3 FUNCTION 03 AUTO SHEADING START OK Now WB H WP H LAMP H H GD2 CDA3 H CDA4 H ADDA5 H D ODD H D EVN C OCO Figure 3 1008 GDA1 Press AUTO SHADING on the LCD to high light then press the OK key shading auto correction will be executed In a while Now END will appear on the screen to indicate the end of shading correc tion CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAP
221. ct all connectors then remove the DC controller PCB Release the tension spring 2 and remove the fixing drive belt Figure 4 310 5 Remove the two screws and remove the con nector mount 3 found at the lower right of the rear of the copier Remove the two screws 5 and disconnect all connectors then remove the composite power supply PCB Figure 4 311 7 Remove the seven screws 7 and remove the fixing drive assembly 6 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Figure 4 312 4 13 4 14 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM Www Duplexing Unit Inlet Motor Mount Assembly Removing the Duplexing Inlet Motor Mount Assembly Disconnect the power plug and remove the following Rear cover 4 screws Flywheel 3 screws Connector mount DC controller PCB 2 screws all connec tors Composite power supply PCB 2 screws all connectors Remove two screws 2 and disconnect the connector 3 then remove the duplexing unit inlet motor 1 Figure 4 313 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC D Set Back Roller Motor Assembly Removing the Set Back Roller Motor Assembly Disconnect the power plug and remove the following Rear cover 4 screws Flywheel 3 screws Connector mount DC controller PCB 2 screws all connec
222. d with a midway pixel or the timing at which the data of the first pixel is read is delayed thereby shifting pixel position Copy a b Principle The position or the timing at which the original illuminating system is started is b varied to shift the position of a C the image Shift in sub scannig direction Figure 3 309 Shifting in Main Scanning Direction Main scanning derection Main scanning direction Not read Reading starts with this pixel Memory CLO paper mm Figure 3 310 Figure 3 311 3 36 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND The image of an original may be shifted as fol r Reference lows by combining shifts in main and sub scan Xm 2 1 ning directions 2 CD Corner Shift Ymax Y2 Y1 The coordinates X1 Y1 of the corner of a specific area is moved to any of the four cor ners of the copy 2 Center Shift 3 Free Shift The coordinates Xm Ym are computed from The coordinates X1 Y1 of a specific area is the size of the area to be shifted and the size moved to a specific point Xp Yp of the copy so that the margins at the top and bottom and left and right will be identical the area will be moved to X1 and 1 0 0 D Corner Shift X2 Xmax 0 0 Y Copy paper Y2 Ymax
223. d 100 copies count SHUT OFF Use it to enable disable You may disable the auto shift function time the sleep function to sleep state IM ANGLE Use it to switch slant Copies made in slant mode may become mode jagged change the setting of this mode from 0 to 1 if such a problem is noted COIN OPERT Coinvender switching Select 1 to support a coin vender DRM MSG Use this to switch the 0 Will not indicate the Replace Drum mes Replace Drum message sage on the control panel default in 230V model 1 Will indicate the Replace Drum message default in 120V model 3 228 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Switching the Baud Rate Drum Resistance Measurements and Thick Paper Mode 5 OPTION 2 BAUD RATE ENV SW AGS NON SPCL PPR SCAN SEL WC I Item Function Description BAUD RATE Use it to change the com 0 19200 baud munication speed of the 9600 baud RS232C interface for ser vicing Be sure to set it to 1 if If the paper size dial of the cassette is set you have selected a to the envelope index the cassette will not cassette exclusively for be identified as an envelope cassette envelopes If the paper size dial of the cassette is set The switch determines to the envelope index the cassette will be whether the machine identified as an envelope casse
224. d the transfer roller in user mode Advise the user to clean the following at leas 2 Clean the separation static eliminator once a week 1 Copyboard Glass Wipe it with a moist cloth thereafter dry wipe it 2 Copyboard Cover RDF Feeding Belt Wipe them with a cloth moistened with a solu tion of mild detergent then dry wipe them COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 29 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION EC VI SAFETY A Laser Beams Since laser beams can be haemful to the human body the copiers scanner system is enclosed within a protective housing and external covers thereby preventing leakage of laser beams outside For this reason there is no likehood of the user s coming into contact with laser beams The copier is approved as a Class 1 laser product under IEC825 in the USA as Class under the Code of Federal Regulations 1040 10 of Title 21 see the label in Figures 1 601 and 602 115 220 240V models only CANON 30 2 SHIMOMARUKO 3 CHOME OHTAKU TOKYO 146 JAPAN MANUFACTURED THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH CDRH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J Figure 1 601 120V Model APPAREIL ARAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1 Figure 1 602 220 240V Model 1 30 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC WARNING Do not insert a screwdriver having a high reflectance or light reflecting objects into the
225. ded horizontally for output Originals may be placed on the copyboard or in the RDF G1 not ADF F1 Figure 3 316 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 41 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 2 on 1 Two Sided Generating 4 Outputs Original Outputs 1213 41 Back 1 on 2 two sided One sided Original Outputs 1 on 2 two sided One sided Face Back The image original width of continuous 2 on 1 is divided vertically for output The original original length is divided horizontally for output Figure 3 317 3 4 on 1 Generating 4 Outputs Original Output No number of effective areas of the last original is specified i e if section 4 of the original is blank out put 4 will be blank Figure 3 318 4 4 on 1 Two Sided Generating 8 Outputs Original Outputs BELLE Face Back 443281 No number of effective areas of the last original is specified i e the same as in the case of 4 on 1 gen erating 4 outputs Figure 3 319 3 42 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 3 OPERATIONS AND e Mirror Image Original Main scanning direction a c c 5 abc 2G Ei NS lt Copy gt Figure 3 320 B Principle When reading data for a single scan from RAM the order of reading is reversed thereby creating mirro
226. detection Different number of originals after jam removal The number of originals on the orig inal tray changed as follows Number of originals copied Number of originals gt set on tray See Supplement Stops immediately upon detection Wrong number of origi nals The last original cannot be detected because the re circulating lever does not fall through the original tray Reference Normally the original tray holds 50 sheets of A5 STMT A4 B5 or LTR or 25 sheets of A3 B4 11717 LGL Stops after counting the 100th original Original forced off The re circulating lever dropped through the original tray while an original was being processed Stops immediately upon detection Wrong original size The original that has been picked up is of a non default size Stops immediately upon detection Wrong original size or mixed sizes in image composition mode See Note 1 D The original is of a size that image composition mode does not accommodate 2 The original is of a size different from the first original Stops immediately upon detection See Supplement Not reset when mode is changed Note1 When executing fax mode with out resetting after copying mode When making a copy in the middle of fax operation or when making a copy without resetting after fax mode Stops operation im mediately up
227. developing clutch Figure 4 323 6 Multi Clutch 1 Remove the rear cover 4 screws and the fly wheel 3 screws 2 Remove the two screws 2 and disconnect the connector 3 then remove the multi clutch Figure 4 324 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 17 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM IV PICK UP ASSEMBLY 2 Removing the Pick Up Feeding Separation Roller 1 Slide out the cassette A Pick Up Assembly 2 Holding the knob assembly pull it off in the axial direction 1 Removing the Pick Up Assembly 1 Remove the cassette from the copier 2 Remove the right cover 3 Pull off the roll 1 of the multi tray cover 4 Detach the cable of the right door 2 from the Separation Roller hook 3 then remove the right door TN Feeding Roller Figure 4 403 Figure 4 401 3 Installing the Pick 5 Disconnect the connector of the pick up UP Feeding Separation Roller EUM Li 1 Holding the knob assembly push it in until a click is heard 6 Remove the four screws 7 and remove the pick up assembly 6 7 xi 3 Ul Figure 4 402 4 18 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 4 Adjusting t
228. e Check with the user to find out the most frequently used type of copy paper Then operate the switch to select A B or Inch con figuration Be sure to set all switches If you changed the switch posi tion you must change the paper size dial label in the next step Each cassette has its own switch Switch Attach the label to the paper size dial At this time be sure to match the boss on the dial and the cut in the label r Note The label may be for A B or Inch configuration Be sure the correct label is used 5 14 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Work 5 INSTALLATION Remarks Holding the lever of the width guide and the length guide slide the guides to suit the index of the appropriate paper size Set the paper size dial to the appropriate paper size Paper size Attach the cassette size label as shown to indicate the selected paper size Keep in mind that the middle cassette will not hold paper A3 or 11x17 in size COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Put coy paper CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 15 5 INSTALLATION F Installing the Feeder Work Remarks 5 16 Install the stamp B RDF G1 Open the RDF delivery cover Remove the stamp cap and install the stamp
229. e 3 324 B Principle When reading data for a single scan from Figure 3 326 RAM a start address address S and an end address address E are specified Then reading B Principle is started at address S when address E is When reading data for a single scan from reached a return is made to address S A specif RAM the start address is shifted for each read ic image is repeated by repeating these opera ing thereby slanting the image nons Address Address nnn 12345678 1 2 12345678 1 2 2 y 5 e lt j 1 pixel 1 byte 1 pixel 1 byte eading pment ove L gt 1st line Readi 2ndline Ecc C Sine L Ath line Figure 3 325 Figure 3 327 3 44 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Sharpness Filter Processing a Sharpness Filter Processing In sharpness filter processing computations are performed so that a crisp or soft image may be obtained as specified on the control panel Figure 3 328b shows the output level occurring as the result of selecting sharpness mode weak for the image data shown in Figure 3 328a In sharpness mode weak the variations in the density of an image are smoothed out to generate a soft image The effect may be used to make moire less conspicuous Figure 3 328c shows the output level occurring when sharpness mode strong
230. e 3 653 for the sequence of operations for face down delivery SCFW SCRV LSTR 6 Registration clutch CL1 Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL7 5 Lower feeding assembly CW CCW inler Ore per 5 Delivery sensor 516 Delivery roller motor M8 Figure 3 653 Face Down Delivery Reference Normally the paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid SL5 remains OFF It turns ON only when feeding copy paper from the fixing assembly to the lower feeding assembly Feeding copy paper from the fixing assembly to the lower feeding assembly Figure 3 654 Movement of the Paper Deflecting Plate 1 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 129 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gra M Detecting Jams 1 Outline As many as seven paper sensors Figure 3 655 are used to check whether copy paper is moving prop erly or to check for jams The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB runs checks at such times as programmed in advance in reference to the presence absence of paper at specific sensors When it detects a jam it will turn OFF the main motor and indicate the Jam message on the control panel Figure 3 655 Sensor Jack Multifeeder paper sensor J113 A11 Pre registration paper sensor 113 A5 Fixing rear paper sensor J109 6 Vertical path paper sensor J113 A2 Re pi
231. e end The machine is designed as such that the pressure between the film and the lower roller of the fixing assembly is released when the front door is opened DC controller Fixing assembly end temperature signal TH2 Sub thermistor TH2 Fixing temperature signal TH1 Main thermistor TH1 Fixing heater H4 Fixing heater drive circuit o oa Relay drive signal N Relay 2 Fixing heater drive signal HTRD 4 amp 9 8 1 I Composite power Zero cross signal amp supply PCB Figure 3 639 3 118 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Controlling the Temperature of the Fixing Heater The fixing heater is turned OFF during standby To prevent fixing faults caused by low temperature either of the following five types of temperature control is executed depending on the temperature of the fixing heater output of the main thermistor TH1 at power on and the count of copies to be made a If the temperature at copy start is less than 100 C either of further five types of control is chosen depending on the count of copies 1 235 to 190 C 2 225 to 180 C 3 215 to 180 C 4 250 t
232. e has start ed service mode COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Press the key twice The LCD changes to the Service Mode Menu screen initial screen SERVICE MODE gt 1 DISPLAY 2 DISPLAY 3 ADJUST 4 FUNCTION 55 OPTION 6 COUNTER 7 ACC 8 FAX Press the appropriate item to highlight Press the OK key to bring up the first screen of the selected screen Keys You will be using the following keys gt D Page Forward key press it to bring up the next page lt lt Page Back key press it to bring up the previous screen OK OK key press it to accept a setting or CANCEL execute an item CANCEL Cancel key press it to bring up the menu screen key press it to move down the levels key press it to move up the levels 3 159 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gw C Using Adjustment Mode and Settings Mode In adjustment mode 3 ADJUST and in settings mode 5 OPTION the settings changed select ed on the control panel are stored in RAM on the image processor PCB and operation control is execut ed according to the settings These settings will be stored permanently when the main power switch is turned off and on after execution The factory default settings of adjustment mode 3 ADJUST are recorded in the label Figure 3 1001 Be sure to re
233. e is 140 C or more at copy 1st to 30th copy gt 205 C start control is exerted so that the tempera 31st to 40th copy gt 200 ture will be 180 C at all times 41st to 50th copy 190 istto 100th gt 180 51st to 100th copy gt 180 Control Note that a less than 100 C at copy start 1st to 40th copy gt 19590 and c 100 or more and less than 140 41st to 50th copy 190 always combined as follows the notation value 51stto 100th copy 180 on label here refers to the label attached to the fixing assembly and the settings recorded on the b If the temperature is 100 C or more or less label be entered in FILM LAMK in service than 140 C at copy start one of further three mode 3 to select a specific fixing control tem types of control is chosen depending on the perature count of copies 215 through 180 C 205 through 180 C and 195 through 180 Control 1st to 5h copy 215 6th to 10th copy gt 2109 11th to 15th copy 20590 16th to 20th copy 200 21st to 30th gt 195 31st to 40th copy 190 41st to 50th copy gt 185 Reference 51stto 100th copy gt 180 C Normally 1 2 or 3 is selected Select a Control higher temperature lower value in service 1st to 15th copy gt 205 mode if fixing faults occur select a lower 16th to 20th copy 20090 temperature higher value if offset occurs
234. e orientation of the originals on the ADF s original tray is reversed lt instead of normal V Figure 3 313 2 on 1 Mode continuous two sided Original A4 x 2 Copy A4R x 1 Orientation of origi nals on copyboard glass Image after copying arrow indicating feeding direction Remarks Book mode ADF in use Original 1st copying 2nd copying Copy 1 Combines the following Reduced copying Image shifting Overlay copying RDF in use COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Original 1st copying 2nd copying Combines the following Reduced copying Image shifting Overlay copying Figure 3 314 2 on 1 Mode overlay CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 39 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Ga rwwwwwsmrMn 4 originals A4 1 copy A4 Orientation of Image after copy originals on ing arrow indi copyboard cating feeding direction Copying Remarks Book mode 1st Original Copy Combines the following copying Reduced copying Image shifting Overlay copying 2nd Original copying RDF in use 1st Original Combines the following copying Reduced copying Image shifting Overlay copying
235. e the four screws and remove the rear cover Remove the feeder unit or the copyboard cover then remove the two screws and remove the upper rear cover Disconnect the connector and disengage the hook assembly 3 then remove the scanner cooling fan Figure 4 503 Move the No 1 mirror mount so that it is as shown when viewed from the rear Remove the screw and remove the fluores cent lamp cover 4 then pull out the scan ning lamp CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Figure 4 504 4 27 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM r Caution The scanning lamp has its own orientation Observe the following when installing it 1 Make sure that the manufacturers name is toward the rear of the machine 2 Keep the transparent side of the lamp toward the reflecting plate 3 Do not touch the transparent side of the lamp Transparent side of the lamp Reflecting plate Figure 4 505 8 Execute R amp D SHADING 12th screen in service mode 3 ADJUST shading for R amp D and factory 4 28 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC B CCD Unit 1 Removing the CCD Unit 1 Disconnect the power plug 2 Remove the copyboard glass 3 Remove the CCD unit cover Figure 4 506 4 Remove the screw and remove the original size sensor 2 to ke
236. e tie wrap 3 and connect the 8P con nector 4 of the unit and the 8P connector 5 of the copier Figure 5 507 3 Fix the unit 6 in place on the copier s rear cover using four screws Figure 5 508 5 36 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON L 5 INSTALLATION 3 1 Checking the Operations If you are not connecting the Communication Control Board A1 or the Interface Board B1 not requiring the Power Supply A1 go to step 4 Connect the connector 1 of the Power Supply A1 to the connector 2 of the Copy Data Controller A1 securely as indicated Check to make sure that the cord is in the groove of the board Groove of the board Figure 5 509 2 Connect the Power Supply A1 to the power COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC plug and check to make sure that LED1 of the Copy Data Controller A1 turns ON LED1 LN21 LED2 LED3 Sw2 SW3 LED4 LED5 LED6 5 2 5 JA1 JC8 JB2 JA2 4 5 JC6 JB1 ceu 09 J5 IPC 6 1 6 1 SW4 swi ON sws Figure 5 510 3 Turn ON the copier s main switch and check to make sure that LED2 of the Copy Data Contr
237. ed by pulse signals A B DC controller PCB 24V 109 8 109 9 109 10 A 109 11 4 f CPU 10 109 12 B 109 13 B Figure 3 646 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 125 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7 Locking the Fixing Assembly The locking between the film and the lower roller of the fixing assembly is designed to be released when the front door is opened Operating the machine with the front door open for servicing work and therefore with the fixing unlocked can displace the film For this reason you must always lock the fixing assembly as follows if you need to operate the machine with its front door open Use the separation cleaning static eliminator cleaning brush attached behind the front door for locking Using the Separation Static Eliminator If the fixing cover is absent use this side Figure 3 649 If the fixing cover is present use this side Figure 3 648 Figure 3 647 D If the fixing assembly cover is found 2 If the fixing cover is not found Insert the handle of the separation static elim Hold the cam stop arm so that it is parallel inator cleaning brush as shown and turn it with the front plate of the machine Insert the 90 to fix in place thereby locking the fixing handle of the separation static eliminator assembly cleaning brush as sho
238. ed for 2nd side SCFW SCRV LSTR SCFW ISCRV LSTR Fixing rear paper sensor PS7 i Paper deflecting plate 1 1 1 2 solenoid SL5 Lower feeding assembly inlet sensor PS12 Delivery sensor 513 Copy paper to the lower feeding assembly 2 Copy paper to the delivery assembly Electrical parts Figure 3 628 2 Jack Fixing rear paper sensor Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid Lower feeding assembly inlet sensor Delivery sensor Jack in the signal line on the DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Table 3 608 J109 6 J105 A5 J105 B2 J105 A2 3 105 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Making Two Sided Copies 1 Outline Figure 3 629 shows the paper path used when making two sided copies For the first side of a two sided copy the copy paper is moved to the delivery side once after it has been moved through the fixing assembly When the copy paper moves past the delivery sensor PS7 the deliv ery roller reverses after a specific period of time The delivery roller motor M8 turns ON a specific peri od of time after copy paper has moved past the fixing paper sensor PS7 For the second side of a two sided copy the delivery roller rotates clock wise then the copy paper is discharged Two sided Overlay 1st side
239. efore changing AGSNON of OPTION in service mode 5 to 0 so that the measurement may be used as a reference For a guide see the diagram below SELECT GAMMA NUL setting AGS MEASURE setting 3 224 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 16 Resetting the Jam History 4 FUNCTION 16 JAM RLS OK CLEAR Pb Item Description Reference page Resetting jam history Use this mode to collectively reset the jam histories shown under DISPLAY in service mode 1 Press JAM RLS to highlight then press the OK key COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 225 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 17 Initializing the Memory RAM 4 FUNCTION 17 CANCEL RAM INIT cms COPY CLEAR OK CLEAR x JUMP ALL CLEAR OK CLEAR x Item Description Reference page Initializing RAM Press the appropriate item to highlight then press the Clear key and press the OK key COPY Select it to initialize the data needed for the copier s service mode 43 5 6 and var ious copying modes to initial values ALL Select it to collectively initialize the above data Executing this item will initialize the back up data of both fax and copier 3 226 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON
240. electrophotographic Charging AC roller charging Exposure Spot laser Copy density adjustment Automatic or manual Development Dry single component toner projection Automatic 2 cassettes Pick up Manual Multifeeder about 5 mm deep Transfer Roller charging Separation Static static eliminator curvature cleaning COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Blade CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3 Performance 120V Types of originals Sheet book 3 D object 2 kg max Maximum size of original 11 17 max Reprodu ction ratio Direct 1 1 0 5 Reduce I 1 0 250 Reduce II 1 0 500 Reduce 1 0 647 Reduce IV 1 0 737 Reduce V 1 0 786 Enlarge I Enlarge II 1 1 214 1 1 294 Enlarge III Enlarge IV 1 2 000 1 4 000 Enlarge V 1 8 000 Zoom 1 0 250 to 8 000 25 to 800 196 increments Wait time 8 6 sec or less 20 from main power on to start of copying 7 9 sec or less from control panel power on sleep to start of copying fax model First copy GP215 9 2 sec or less shortest mode Continuous copying 100 copies Copy size Cassette pick up 297 x 420 mm max 11 x17 279x432mm max A5 STMT min Multifeeder 297 x 431 8
241. en stopped Thereafter close the RF without removing the paper See below for standards DOC ST T or DOC ST B INTRVL T or P INTRVL n 1 6 1 0x3mm 7 Press the OK key The sheet on the copyboard glass will be discharged to the RF s original tray However in the case of DOC STP T and INTRVL T the sheet will be discharged to the RF s original delivery tray 8 To end the work press the Reset key twice to leave service mode COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 239 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Adjusting the RDF Sensor Cleaning the Belt This screen is effective only when an RDF is installed 7 ACC 02 SENS ADJ OK START x S BCLN T OK START x S OK START x Ct X Item Function Description SENS ADJ Use it to execute auto 1 Press SENS SDJ to highlight sensitivity adjustment for 2 Without any original on the RF s original the RDF sensor tray press the OK key Original sensor S1 1 will appear under SENS indicating Registration sensor taht automatic adjustment is being executed S3 f 1 remains for 30 sec or more suspect a fault in the original tray sensor S1 regis tration sensor S3 or RF controller 3 If 0 appears under SENS ADJ indic
242. en the light blocking plate blocks the appropriate sensor When copy paper starts to run out the lifter rises gradually when paper fully runs out the cassette paper sensor Q1604 for upper detects the absence of paper Lifter E Light blocking plate Figure 3 620 Full of copy paper Out of cop paper Lifter Pick up roller Pick up roller condition Copy paper Lifter Lifter Gear an Light blocking level sensor Q1607 Q1606 upper cassette Gear when the cassette is full of copy paper Figure 3 621 Detecting the Level of Paper inside the Cassette upper COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 93 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Table 3 605 shows the relationship between the level of copy paper as detected and the sensors as well as indications on the control panel Level Indication on control panel 500 sheets 0 sheets 1 The light blocking plate is over the sensor 0 The light blocking plate is not over the sensor Table 3 605 3 94 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING E Detecting the Size of Copy Paper 1 Outline The size of copy paper is detected by the machine s CPU in reference to the cassette dial set by the user See Figure 3 623 for swit
243. ensor LED2 1 paper present 1 paper present A D value stored in adjustment mode 1 paper present 1 paper present 1 light ON 1 light ON O O belt motor clock sensor S10 feeding motor clock sensor S9 registration roller clock sensor S11 PCB internal signal PCB internal signal Not used Not used Not used alternates 1 and 0 dur ing rotation alternates 1 and 0 dur ing rotation alternates 1 and 0 dur ing rotation 3 188 OI OONN COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC copier communication signal copier communication signal copier communication signal Not used copier communication signal Not used Not used Not used CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING a Input Output Ports of the RDF 2 2 Address Indication DFPA PCB internal signal Not used PCB internal signal belt motor drive signal PCB internal signal feeding motor drive signal PCB internal signal pick up motor ON PCB internal signal ON PCB internal signal ON PCB internal signal NOOR O S PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal original detection LED PCB internal signal brake clutch paper retaining solenoid SL2 belt motor CW rota tion pick up motor CW rotation ON ON ON ON DF ExPA DF ExPB O O O
244. ensor PI6 does not receive clock signals for 1 sec or more after the tray feeding motor drive signal TFMD has been generated The tray shift motor M7 fails to rotate The tray position sensor 112 has a fault The tray position sensor 12 does not turn on or off 2 5 sec or more after the tray shift motor drive signal has been generated 3 268 The guide bar drive motor M4 fails to rotate The guide bar home position sensor PI5 does not turn on or off 2 5 sec or more after the guide bar swing motor drive signal has been generated COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Main cause Description The stapler motor M3 does not The state of the stapling home position rotate sensor MS7 does not change within 1 The stapler swing motor M5 sec after the stapler motor M3 CW rota doe not rotate tion signal has been generated and the state of the stapling home position sensor MS7 does not change within 1 sec after the stapler motor CCW rotation signal has been generated thereafter The stapler position sensor PI4 does not turn off within 1 sec after the stapler swing motor M5 has been generated The bin shift motor M1 does The lead cam home position sensor 1 not rotate does not turn off within 1 sec after the bin shift motor drive signal has been generat ed does not turn on
245. ep it away from the CCD unit Figure 4 507 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5 Remove the screw and remove the CCD unit C IPU PCB retaining spring 3 disconnect the connector E off the flat cable 5 to remove the 1 Removing the IP PCB unit 1 Remove the copyboard glass and remove the CCD unit cover 2 Return the No 1 mirror mount to home posi tion 3 Remove the four screws 2 and move the IP cover 1 to the front then remove it while lift ing its rear first Figure 4 508 Caution Do not remove any paint locked screws Particularly never remove the screw 6 Figure 4 510 Figure 4 509 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 29 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 4 5 4 30 Remove the screw an remove the original size sensor 4 then remove the flat cable and all connectors to the IP PCB 5 Figure 4 511 Remove the four screws and remove the PI PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC D Laser Scanner Assembly 1 k Removing the Scanner Cooling Fan Duct 1 Remove the four screws
246. er Paper Width Basic Setting 3 ADJUST 01 MF A6R xxxxx XXXxx 4 lt 4 XXxxx lt XXXXX X Description Remarks Settings Use it to fine adjust or enter the multi If you have replaced the image feeder paper width basic setting processor PCB be sure to enter the value recorded on MF A6R Indicates the stored A6R the service label 105mm value of the multifeeder For how to enter a new value paper width sensor after replacement of the paper 0765535 width sensor see service MF A4R Indicates the stored A4R handbook p 2 15 210mm value of the multifeeder paper width sensor MF A4 Indicates the stored A4 297mm value of the multifeeder paper width sensor COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 197 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Primary Charging Roller Transfer Charging Roller Developing Bias 8 ADJUST 02 PRI DC IMG PRI DC no IMG lt DVLP DC IMG DVLP DC no IMG xxxxx lt TRNS IMG TRNS no IMG PRI AC IMG PRI no IMG lt bb C Item Description Remarks Settings PRI DC Indicates the primary charging DC out If you have replaced the image IMG put effective when an image is processor PCB
247. eration is not possible Stops stapling Flashes the Manual Staple ke y Indicates a message on the copier s control panel Wait until the machine auto matically recovers about 1 sec after the sta pler safety sensor turns off Open and then close the stapler cover Stapling safety protection mecha nism acti vation The stapler safety sensor MS6 has turned on during stapling operation Stops stapling No indication Remove the cause that turned on the stapler safety sensor MS6 wait until the machine recov ers automatically in about 1 sec after the stapler safety sensor turns off Over sta pling capacity The volume of paper in a single bin has exceeded the maximum value 20 sheets in stapler sort mode Finishes sorting but stops without stapling Indicates a mes sage on the copier s control panel Remove all paper stack Full sta pling capacity The volume of paper in a single bin has reached the maximum value 20 sheets in stapler sorter mode Operates nor mally No indication Remove all paper stack Mixed paper SIZes Sheets of different widths have been placed in the bin Finishes sorting but stops without stapling No indication Remove all paper stack Paper in bin Paper is remaining inside the bin Indicates a mes sage if stapler sorter mode is selected other wise operates
248. es primary charging AC offset 2 Indicates transfer charging offset Indicates scanning lamp offset Indicates developing bias DC compo nent offset APVC GAIN APVC OFST PDC OFST OFST1 PAC OFST2 ATVC OFST FL OFST DDC OFST Service Label attached to the composite power supply PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC If you have replaced the com posite power supply PCB be sure to enter the value recorded on the label attached to the composite power supply PCB see P3 160 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 199 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 8 ADJUST 04 H ADJ DXXXXX V ADJ DXXXXX RESIST DXXXXX RSIDE SENSHP xxxxx lt PVE OFST DXXXXX 4 Registration Related Items Description Settings Remarks Use it to fine adjust the CCD reading start unit 1mm position main scanning direction book approx at 23 mode Index rear Copyboard glass A higher setting shifts the read start position to the right Use it to adjust the image reading start posi unit 1mm tion sub scanning direction approx at 23 Index leading edge Copyboard glass A higher setting delays the registration ON timing RESIST Use it to adjust the registration clutch ON Standard timing leading edge margin 2 5 1 0 mm 3 200 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215
249. figured papers To select a paper other than indicated 11x17 LTR LGL STMT use service mode See 10 of 5 Checking the Operation For control of AB configured papers A3 A4 B4 B5 For service mode For normal operation For group control 1 See Note For not using group control Not used Note If the Control Card V is to be used or if remote control only by the Copy Data Controller A1 is to be used set bit 4 of the DIP switch SW5 to OFF Table 5 501 5 34 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON EE 5 INSTALLATION 2 3 If not to use group control shift bit 4 of the A To connect the Communication Control Board DIP switch SW5 to OFF A1 or the Interface Board B1 requires Power To connect the Interface Board B1 Com Supply A1 munication Control Board A1 or the Inter face Board A1 see Setting the Board in the appropriate Installation Procedure ele LED1 LED2 LED3 eee 1 5 n n ele 9 5 JB2 JB1 7 JA1 82 coun Figure 5 504 JC5 JBI cpu 09 J5 B To not connect the Communication Control 1 or the Interface Board B1 does not require Power Supply A1
250. film 5 Unit mm Fixing film p rear 27 front Figure 3 643 Tension roller Y 1 Drive roller ON Normal LJ 1 _ ON 7 Torear OFF L fl To front PE Figure 3 644 3 124 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC The fixing film motor M5 is used to correct the position of the fixing film When displacement of the fixing film is detect ed the DC controller rotates the fixing film motor to move the rear of the tension roller up and down thereby moving the fixing film to the center and correcting the displacement If the fixing film has become replaced to the rear the tension roller is moved down to return the fixing film to the front If the fixing film has become displaced to the front the tension roller is moved up to return the fixing film to the rear These operations are executed as necessary to control the position of the fixing film If the film has become displaced so much that the correction mechanism cannot control it E007 will be indicated See the Service Handbook Fixing film motor M5 gt Displaced to the front D gt eee Displaced to the rear Figure 3 645 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON eee S OPERATIONS AND b Controlling the Fixing Film Motor The fixing film motor is a stepping motor rotat
251. from a stack and moved to the origi nal tray after copying During fax transmission on the other hand the topmost original is picked up from the stack and moved to the original delivery tray after read ing the image You can select copier pick up for fax transmis sion under FAX DOC FEE in service mode 5 However the order of the pages generated by the fax at the other end will be reversed and the stamping function cannot be used Picking Up Originals for Copying Originals go EUN face up RDF G1 Originsl tray Scanner moving L Picking Up Originals for Fax Transmission Originals RDF G1 Scanner moving Original delivery tray Uf COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON b ADF F1 For ADF F1 an original is read by stopping the scanner at a point about 20 mm from home posi tion and the original is read while it is being moved stream reading You must place the originals face down and they will be read starting with the first page To collate the sheets of copy paper they are turned over for delivery face down delivery You may enable or disable this face down delivery in copy specifications settings mode At time of shipment ON is selected When making two sided copies face down deliver
252. g Operates Retained by power supply SLEEP 1 Operates All functions are avail Standby Operates able Table 3 802 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 145 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Cycle of SLEEP Mode States Main power switch OFF Main power switch ON Standby Composite power supply PCB CPU Image processor PCB CPU ON All functions are enabled LCD ON Control panel power supply switch OFF Control panel power switch ON Auto sleep ON or Off hook Weekly timer ON SLEEP 1 quick start mode All functions not reauiri quiring operation power SUPEI FCP ON are enabled e g timer transmission Image processor PCB CPU ON reception printing LCD OFF There is no transmission reservations There is no timer operation reservations Incoming call timer polling timer reporting detection There is no reception document There is no document for printing During off hook There is no Printer Board Off hook All the above conditions exist Control panel power switch ON SLEEP 2 power saving mode Composite power supply PCB CPU ON NO function is available except Image processor PCB CPU OFF FAX reception LCD OFF
253. g up the 3rd Screen Execute shading auto correction See the descriptions for shading auto correction At the end of shading auto correction press the Reset key once With the feeder or the copyboard cover open make two solid black copies 10 Check to make sure that is indicated in the upper left corner of the LCD and press the key once The Service Mode Menu screen will appear If is not indicated press the service switch and press the key twice 11 Press FUNCTION 4 to highlight then press the OK key 12 Press the Page key to bring up the PD CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Density Auto Correction screen 4th screen 4 FUNCTION 04 PD PRINT START WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY SANPLING OK DATA SET OK A B D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MUTI 0 gt CASETTE1 A4 CASETTE2 A4 C Figure 3 1011 3 245 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 13 Select either MULTI CASSETTE1 or CAS SETTE2 Press the appropriate item to select so that the cursor points to the item 14 Generate a PD pattern print Press PD PRINT to highlight then press the Copy Start key You will be using the pattern print later 15 Place five to ten sheets of blank copy paper on the copy board and close the feeder or the copyboard cover Copyboard g
254. gative Positive Reversal The negative positive reversal circuit executes the following image processing Negative positive reversal Framing Blanking Pasting a Negative Positive Reversal Level conversion is executed so that the white area of an original will be black and the black area will be white on copies Output level 255 200 128 lt gt 55 lt 0 55 128 200 255 Input level Figure 3 332 concept of level conversion original copy abc a b c Figure 3 333 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON b Framing Blanking For framing blanking areas may be as many as 4 areas for a rectangle as many as 10 points may be specified B Framing The signals representing non specified areas are forced to represent white Area Figure 3 334 Framing B Blanking As opposed to framing the signals represent ing the specified area are forced to represent white Figure 3 335 Blanking e Pasting This function may be used when the Retention Memory Unit option is installed Images stored in the retention memory in advance and the image on the copyboard glass are synthesized for output 3 47 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 Density Processing a Logarithmic Correction The CCD output has linear characteristics in relation to the light reflected by an original However the density of a
255. gradation and check for fog ging white lines and uneven left right density f gradation is not good suspect a fault in the laser system f fogging is noted suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum developing assembly or laser system f white bands are noted suspect a fault in the developing system or dirt on the trans fer charging roller If white lines are noted suspect a shading fault because of dirt on the standard white plate f uneven density left right is noted sus pect dirt on the primary charging roller or a fault in the developing system CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 L TEST5 grid test print L TST7 horizontal line test print LLL CHER nnm nmn PEE EEE 11 1111 111111 iG RRR EERE Use it to check straight line and angles Use it to check straight lines f a discrepancy is noted suspect a dis If a discrepancy is noted suspect a dis placed laser beam or a fault in beam detec placed laser beam or a fault in beam detec tion tion 6 L TEST6 vertical line test print Use it to check straight lines f a discrepancy is noted suspect a dis placed laser beam or a fault in beam detec tion COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON IN
256. h pixel of the CCD is not the same 2 The degree of transmission of the lens is different between the center and the sides 3 The intensity of the scanning lamp is differ ent between the center and the sides 4 The scanning lamp can deteriorate Shading correction is performed to correct the above discrepancies Shading correction may be executed for each copy or executed automatically according to the target value determined in ser vice mode a Shading Automatic Correction Shading automatic correction is executed by using service mode 4 FUNCTION In this type of correction the density of blank paper and the standard white plate is measured and stored in memory The stored data is subject ed to computation and used as the target value for shading correction 2 Standard white plate t 5 200 Scanning lamp EXT No 2 mirror o ee EIE No 1 mirror Lens 000 k wi 3 mirror Figure 3 305 3 34 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC b Shading Correction Shading correction is executed for every scan ning of an original In this type of correction the light of the scan ning lamp is directed to the standard white plate Figure 3 305 and the reflected light is turned into digital signals by the analog image process ing block The reflected light data which has been turned into digital signals are sent to the shading circuit of the image processor PCB The shading circuit compares
257. he Registration Rear Front Direction Check to make sure that the margin along the image front is 2 5 1 5 mm on copies Try all cas settes gt lt 2 5 1 5 e 0 NO Figure 4 404 If the margin is not as indicated perform the following 1 Slide out the cassette from the holder to be adjusted 2 Remove the two screws 2 and remove the horizontal registration mount 1 Figure 4 405 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 Loosen the hex screw and move the horizon tal registration plate to the rear front so that the width is as specified Horizontal registration plate Hex screw Figure 4 406 Note Adjust the horizontal registration plate by matching the inner side of the L shape on the horizontal plate is at a specific scale notch lt gt E 4 19 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM B Multifeeder Assembly 1 Removing the Multifeeder Unit 1 Open the multifeeder assembly 0 and insert a large flat blade screwdriver into the top 2 of the connector cover and turn it to remove the cover then disconnect the connector Figure 4 407 2 Close the multifeeder assembly and open the right door then pull out the
258. he copy images are not optimum 1 Shading Adjustment Work Remarks Start service mode and execute Start service mode shading Open the front door Insert the handle of the static eliminator cleaning brush Press the service switch with a into the fixing assembly releasing assembly hex key Turn ON the door switch with the door switch actuator Press the key twice Press FUNCTION 4 on the LCD to highlight then press the OK key Press the key to turn 4 FUNCTION 03 pages to the Shading screen AUTO SHEADING START OK Now WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH GDA1 xxH GD2 xxH CDA4 xxH 5 xxH D ODD xxH D EVN xxH qq X bb JC Cok Press AUTO SHADING START on the LCD to high light Press the OK key Shading will be executed Shading will end when Now END appears COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 25 5 INSTALLATION 2 Automatic Density Adjustment Work Remarks Execute automatic density adjust ment Execute PD 200PWM and 600PWM Press the Reset key once to end service mode will be indicated in the upper left corner of the screen Holding the feeder or the copy board cover at about 45 make two A4 copies solid black Press the key twice Press FUNCTION
259. he small size copy counter from the cassette 5 S CAST6 Indicates the small size copy counter from the cassette 6 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 235 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 COUNTER 03 S OVLY TRAY xxxxx S DUP TRAY xxxxx COPY L PRINT xxxxx FAX L PRINT PDL L PRINT xxxxx ETC L PRINT xxxxx COPY S PRINT xxxxx FAX S PRINT xxxxx PDL S PRINT xxxxx ETC S PRINT JUD C Indication Description S OVLY_TRAY Indicates the small size overlay copy 2nd side count S DUP TRAY Indicates the small size two sided 2nd side count COPY L PRINT Indicates the large size copy cont FAX L PRINT Indicates the large size fax print count PDL L PRINT Indicates the large size printer print count ETC L PRINT Indicates the large size print count by other system COPY S PRINT Indicates the small size copy count FAX S PRINT Indicates the small size copy count PDL S PRINT Indicates the small size printer print count ETC S PRINT Indicates the small size print count by other system 3 236 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 COUNTER 04 L ORG FEED xxxxx S ORG FEED xxxxx SCAN TOTAL COPY SCAN XXXXX FAX SCAN XXXXX PDL SCAN XXXXX ETC SCAN XXXXX PRINT JAM XXXXX DH JAM XXXXX 44 L b
260. heck to make sure that none of the following is missing box that comes with the machine Copy tray and take out the parts and mate Operators Manual rials 3 pcs if the machine is with fax functions 2 pcs if oth erwise Grounding cord Drum unit Toner Lower right cover Cassette size label inside the cassette One touch key label if machine w fax function Modular cable if machine w fax function Original delivery tray if RDF ADF standard machine Tray hinge RDF only Tray hinge cover RDF only Remove the scanner fixing screw from the outside of the lifter cover Slide out the cassette and remove the packing from inside 5 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Work Remarks Open the front door Shift the feeding assembly releasing lever to release the feeding assembly Developing assembly locking lever E T Turn the developing assembly locking lever in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure Feeding assembly releasing lever Remove the screws shown in the figure Keep the removed screws for Dummy drum Screw installation of the drum unit Pull the dummy drum straight out to the front to remove Dispose of the dummy drum
261. hown in Figure 3 510a The absence of toner is assumed by monitoring TEP only while the developing clutch remains ON i e such periods as when the developing clutch remains ON are added The sum of periods from when the toner absent signal TEP occurs until the end of the toner absent signal occurring as a result of stirring the toner is referred to as T1 The sum of period from the start of the next toner absent signal until the end of the toner absent sig nal is referred to as T2 Thereafter the sums are cleared and replace by alternately adding subsequent T1 and T2 Based on the results of the foregoing additions the absence of toner is assumed for the following T1 T2 gt 20 sec toner absent level 1 T1 or T2 160 sec toner absent level 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 71 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING urs sSn s a 3 Detecting Waste Toner The waste toner that has been scraped by the cleaning blade is forwarded to the rear of the cleaner housing by the waste toner feeding blade inside the drum cleaner The coupling shown in Figure 3 511 is pushed against the blade under the pressure of a spring to trans mit the drive of the main motor to rotate the blade When the cleaner housing becomes full of toner the rotation of the waste toner feeding blade drags and the coupling moves back and forth in the axi
262. ic image on the surface of the drum is turned into a visible image by toner As shown in Figure 2 108 the developing assembly consists of a developing cylinder made of a fixed magnet and a cylinder rotating around it and a magnetic blade The main ingredients of the toner are mag netite and resins The toner has insulating prop erties and is charged to a negative potential by friction against the cylinder The GP215 GP200 deposits toner over the areas on the surface of the drum whose charges have been neutralized by a laser beam light areas for this reason the polarity of the toner is negative which is the same as the polarity of pri mary charging Developer Blade O Concentrated magnetic field Z 2255 5 T PESE Magnet Magnet Figure 2 109 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 COPYING PROCESS A concentrated magnetic field occurs from the G Transfer step 5 magnet to the edge of the blade attracting toner Once inside the field the toner becomes virtu ally immobile because of the strong bond with the blade so that when deposited it forms an even thin layer on the cylinder An AC bias and a DC bias negative compo nent are applied to the developing cylinder and the blade at the same time developing bias the negative component of the developing bias is stronger than the positive component Transfer guide Tra
263. icates items adjusted in service mode and allows changes to settings 4 FUNCTION Function Mode Executes machine operations Indicates items that may be automatically adjusted through execution from the screen 5 OPTION Settings Mode Indicates items that may be changed for machine mainte nance or items that may be changed to suit the needs of the user 6 COUNTER Counter Mode Indicates the numbers of machine operations 7 ACC Options Mode Indicates items for options allowing changes to the set tings 8 FAX Fax Service Mode Indicates items to be set changed or operated for fax func tions from the screen 3 158 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww ssa lt wws lt r cs sswmFwhrr 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING B Using Service Mode 1 Starting Service Mode 1 Open the front door and insert the handle of the static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing assembly Separation static eliminator cleaning brush Figure 3 1001 2 Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly If you want to execute a specific mode such as I O display while making copies see the appropriate copying modes Door switch actuator Figure 3 1002 3 Press the service switch with a hex key will appear in the upper left corner of the LCD indicating that the machin
264. icing total copy count 2 L TOTAL Indicates the large size copy print count L MULTI Indicates the large size copy count from the multifeeder L 5 1 Indicates the large size copy count from the cassette 1 L CAST2 Indicates the large size copy count from the cassette 2 L Indicates the large size copy count from the cassette 3 L CAST4 Indicates the large size copy count from the cassette 4 L 515 Indicates the large size copy count from the cassette 5 L CAST6 Indicates the large size copy count from the cassette 6 3 234 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 COUNTER 02 L OVLY TRAY xxxxx L TRAY S TOTAL XXXXX 5 MULTI xxxxx S CAST 1 XXXXX S CAST2 XXXXX S CAST3 XXXXX S CAST4 XXXXX S CAST5 XXXXX S CAST6 XXXXX Ct C X ok Indication Description L OVLY TRAY Indicates the large size overlay copy 2nd side pick up count L DUP TRAY Indicates the large size two sided copy 2nd side pick up count S TOTAL Indicates the small size copy print count S MULTI Indicates the small size multifeeder pick up count 5 CAST1 Indicates the small size copy count from the cassette 1 S CAST2 Indicates the small size copy counter from the cassette 2 5 CAST3 Indicates the small size copy counter from the cassette 3 S CASTA Indicates the small size copy counter from the cassette 4 S CAST5 Indicates t
265. ier functions AUTO CLEAR SET TINGS Use it to specify whether to return or not to return to the functions selected under initial functions after auto clear Return To return to initial function setting mode Do not return To return to the mode before auto clear Return SYSTEM DIFF SIZE ORIGINAL Use it to specify whether originals of differ ent feeding widths will be placed in the feed er in non copier mode ON To place originals of mixed sizes but of the same feeding width OFF To not to place originals of different sizes AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT Use it to select the appropriate automatic density adjustment mode Priority on Speed To use text mode for density adjustment No pre scanning Priority on Image Quality To execute pre scanning to identify image image quality text text photo mode Priority on speed AUDIBLE TONES Use it to specify whether to sound or not sound the three buzzers input alarm job end ON To sound OFF Not to sound Input ON Alarm ON Job end ON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC DRAWER ELIGIBILITY FOR APS ADS Use it to select cassette holders manual feeding tray for auto paper selection and auto cassette selection ON To include in auto selection OFF To specify inclusion only in manual mode CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Manual OFF Cassettes 1 through 6 ON 1 25
266. ime on specific days of the week CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON None may be any day from Sunday to Saturday 1 27 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION EwC scs lt nY i 3 Adjustment Cleaning The machine is adjusted before shipment from the factory but the type of copy paper or original can cause discrepancies in relation to original sizes and densities To correct such problems the user may exe cute the following modes for adjustment cleaning Item Description Factory settings Zoom Fine Adjustment Use it to fine adjust slight discrepancies noted between original and copy sizes in relation to vertical and horizontal reproduc tion ratios Range 1 0 to 1 0 Unit 0 1 Exposure Recalb Use it with the density adjustment memory at its center value to adjust the copy density when making copies of a typical original without dirt or fogging Feeder Cleaning Use it to clean the pick up roller assembly by placing copy paper in the feeder and cir culating it inside the feeder Roller Cleaning Use it to clean the roller cleaning assembly if copies are soiled 1 28 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION V RO UTINE WORK BY Advise the user to perform the following when image faults 0 vertical white spots are noted TH E USER 1 Clean the charging roller an
267. in main scan ning direction on large size papers when using the feeder and copying a non default original Nomal copying mode Priority on paper mode Center reference output prevents missing images FAX DOC FEED 3 230 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC use it to switch reading patterns for RDF G1 fax originals The topmost page of the stack of originals will be picked up and read first and dis charged on the right The bottommost page of the stack of origi nals will be picked up and read first and returned to the original tray same way as copying CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Setting the Mode of Notation for the U1 Cassette universal 1 cassette 5 OPTION 3 CST U1 U1 0 0 lt 0 CST U1 0 FLSC 0 lt 0 1 A LGL A OFI Pb Function Description Use it to turn on and off 0 If the paper size dial of the cassette is set the U size cassette paper to U1 U1 will be indicated on the LCD name 1 If the paper size dial of the cassette is set to U1 the abbreviation selected in the fol lowing item will be indicated on the LCD 0 FLSC Use it to specify the U1 If 1 is set for the previous item one of the fol 1 OFI size cassette paper name lowing may be selected for indication 2 E OFI abbreviation
268. ine Protocol controller PCB 3 30 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Protocol control Protocol exchange between Printer Board and Network Interface Board Table 3 301 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING B Analog Image Processing 1 Outline The analog processor PCB converts CCD drive signals and CCD output signals analog signals to dig ital signals It also executes AE measurement 2 CCD CCD Driver The GP215 GP200 s CCD is a linear image sensor consisting of a single line of 7500 photocells The signals subjected to photoelectric conversion in the photocell unit are forwarded to the CCD drive circuit The even number pixels and the odd number pixels are sent separately The CCD drive circuit synthe sizes the signals coming separately in even number units and odd number units for output to the A D con version circuit Analog processor PCB CCD Odd number pixel signal Image signal Image signal CCD drive circuit analog A D digital Even numbe conversion pixel signal Reference signal voltage circuit ABC circuit ABC setting signal ABC circuit OFF signal Analog signal setting signal Clock pulses Figure 3 302 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 31 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 A
269. ing 1 circuit assembly FAX Motherboard m FAX Board Video signal switching circiut System Motherboard CPU j Printer Etc Li SCSI Board Fig 3 905 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 151 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG b Protocol Controller PCB In terms of PDL units the Printer Board that may be installed to the machine may be a PS PCL Board PCL5e Board or PS kanji Board Of them the three boards may be used in common with the Multi Device Controller requiring conversion of printing commands printer commands and operation sequences to suit the operating environment of the GP215 GP200 The Protocol Controller PCB converts printer commands from a personal computer to control the print er system of the GP215 GP200 to support GP215 GP200 specific multiple cassette functions not found in a configuration consisting of a Multi Device Controller and a GP55 GP30F Network Interface Board CPU LAN _ U DP controller RAM ROM Printer Board CPU s gr e Command CPU CPU F amp conversion circuit Image processing Video circuit Memory controller I F Controller mage processor PCB Board Protocol controller PCB 3 152 COPYRIGH
270. int about 10 mm from the edge of the paper being moved The factors determining the detection start position are the cassette size and the slide guide of the multifeeder assembly Figure 3 635 shows the sequence of operations for rear front registration detection Main power ON Re pick up start INTR STMB PFR Set back roller d motor M6 Re pick up solenoid 514 Lower feeding assembly re pick up clutch L5 Re pick up front paper sensor PS11 7 Vertical path paper sensor PS8 Vertical path roller clutch CL3 Horizontal registration Reverse 5 Forward Reverse motor M9 EN Horizontal sensor MEME PS14 H P pl Z Horizontal sensor 514 S P P 10 Edge of paper 4 1 1 42 1 The set back roller motor may turn ON OFF depending on the copy count 2 The re pick up flapper solenoid may turn ON depending on the copy count 3 The sensoer may turn ON OFF during set back operation depending on the copy count 4 The edge of the paper is detected a checkis made when the light blocking plate is away 5 The paper edge position differs depending on copy paper size making SP different HP Home position of the horizontal registration sensor SP Detecti
271. io The scanning lamp illu minates the original and the reflected light is pro jected on the CCD through mirrors and lenses The scanner moves for ward in reference to the vertical path roller paper detection signal SCRV scanner reverse While the scanner is moving in reverse Returns the scanner to home position in prepa ration for the next copy ing operation LSTR last rota tion COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC From the end of SCRV until copy paper moves past the delivery sensor Cleans the surface of the drum as post pro cessing removes charges Table 3 102 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Discharges the last copy paper In 2 min after the end of LSTR the indications on the control panel return to the Standard screen indications The time may be changed in com mon settings mode 3 19 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM A Outline The original exposure system here refers to the functions involved between the illumination of an orig inal and the projection of the reflected light on the CCD Figure 3 201 shows its outline and Figure 3 202 its construction No 2 mirror Lens I i l S 777 Analog No mirror PI processor 2 2 ____ __ Wv FW
272. ion curve DC component of the developing bias However during printing under a printer func tion the density is adjusted by fixing the density correction curve and varying the bias DC compo nent to maintain good gradation To correct image faults occurring because of changes in the drum control is exerted at a spe cific timing according to AGS measurement to increase the developing bias CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 67 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING E Controlling the Separation Static Eliminator Bias 1 Turning ON and OFF the Separation Static Eliminator Bias The separation static eliminator ON signal SEBON causes the CPU Q605 on the composite power supply PCB to drive the separation static eliminator bias drive circuit to apply a bias on the separation sta tic eliminator 2 Controlling the Voltage to a Specific Level The separation static eliminator bias output is returned to the bias drive circuit to control the voltage to a specific value 3 Switching the Separation Static Eliminator Bias Voltage The separation bias differs physically for copying on the first and second side of a two sided or an over lay copy To suit differences the separation static eliminator drive signal 1 2 is used to switch the bias voltage ensuring stable separation Photosensitive drum Composite power supply PCB T101 Transformer Separation circuit static eliminator
273. k up roller for copying on the second side 1 When stacking is over the set back roller is moved clockwise and the copy paper is moved until the re pick up sensor PS11 detects the leading edge Y Pg 2nd copy paper PS11 9 Re pick up roller 1st copy paper Set back roller 2 The copy paper is continuously moved since the re pick up flapper solenoid SL4 turns ON a specif ic period of time after the re pick up paper sensor PS11 turns ON only the first sheet moves through the re pick up roller and the second and subsequent sheets will be moved to on the flapper plate Flapper PS12 N 2nd copy paper AGERE PS11 Re pick up roller Set back roller 1st copy paper PS11 Re pick up roller Set back roller 4 copy paper Figure 3 633 3 When the trailing edge of the first copy paper moves past the set back roller the set back roller rotates in reverse to move the copy paper to a point where the leading edge of the next copy paper will not reach the re pick up sensor PS11 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 113 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 3 Rear Front Registration a Outline The sheets of copy paper in the lower feeding assembly are picked up without alignment for rear front direction requiring detecting of a rear front displacement while being fed The rear front registration
274. l 0 SWO Intensity selection signal 1 SW2 Laser intensity setting circuit Intensity selection signal 2 SW2 Bias control ON Image signal AP CON Bias control processor circuit PCB ice Laser drive signal LSRD VR1204 Current Do not touch in the field Figure 3 403 3 54 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND Laser output characteristics Laser output characteristics at temperature T1 Photo output P at temperature T2 1 Laser output current Ib lo T1 Bias current for temperature T1 lo T2 lo T2 Bias current for temperature T2 Drive current Figure 3 404 2 Switching the Laser Output The laser output may be either high medium or low ensuring the best image for the selected mode The output is switched by the output signal intensity selection signal 0 1 2 from the image processor PCB Each of these laser outputs is used for its respective mode as shown Laser output Mode High Text mode text photo mode Medium Photo mode FAX output Low Printer output COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 55 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING D Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 1 Operation The laser
275. lass Figure 3 1012 16 Press WHIE MEASURE on the screen to highlight and press the OK key The scanner will move forward to read the blank copy paper 17 Remove the blank copy paper from the copy board glass and place the generated pattern print on the copyboard glass against the V marking at the rear left You must place the pattern print correctly or correct adjustment will not be possible Place the pattern print as shown When the pattern print is placed reversing left right its orientation the image becomes appreciably light Printed side down Figure 3 1013 3 246 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 18 Press DENSITY SAMPLING to highlight then press the OK key The scanner makes 13 scans 19 At the end of the operation check to make sure that the values under A B and D on the LCD are as follows If the values are not as shown start over at step 7 since the adjustment may have been wrong r Reference A B and D are approximate values so that optimum images may still be obtained even if the values are outside the range you may omit temporary remedy as long as the images are optimum For PD and 200PWM 20 lt lt 50 40 lt lt 40 0 lt D lt 8 For 600PWM 20 lt lt 60 70 lt lt 20 0 lt D lt 8 20 Check the above and press DATA SET to highlight then press the OK key This will set the values under A B and D which ha
276. mbly rings from the front of the machine 1 Removing the Delivery Assembly Lower Cover 1 Turn OFF the power and disconnect the power supply 2 Open the front cover 3 Open the delivery assembly and remove the delivery assembly connector cover Snap off the connector cover with a finger x Figure 4 420 4 Remove the transfer guide unit 5 Remove the registration roller Figure 4 421 4 Disengage the hook 3 of the delivery assem bly lower cover 2 Figure 4 422 4 24 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5 Close the delivery assembly and remove the 3 Pull out the spacer 1 from the right side of delivery assembly lower cover the delivery assembly r Caution The delivery assembly lower cover cannot be removed unless the delivery assembly is closed Be sure to close the delivery assem bly after releasing the hook 2 Removing the Delivery assembly 1 Disconnect the connector 2 Open the delivery assembly and remove the screw 2 to remove the cable from the machine rear front Sir as 016 I 4 Release the bushing D by shifting it to the ccs 00 V N 6 187 H3 Up Figure 4 423 Figure 4 425 5 Move the
277. mistor TH1 tH2 1 The microprocessor on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the thermistor TH1 TH2 if it detects overheating of the heater or error low temperature it stops the power to the heater and turns off the power E000 through E003 will be registered 2 f the error temperature detection circuit finds that the output of TH1 is 250 or more or that of TH2 is 260 for 0 2 sec or more the heater error detection signal HTNG will be issued to turn off the relay stopping the power to the fixing hater and turning off the power b Thermal Fuse FU1 When the temperature around the thermal fuse reaches 226 and the condition remains for a specific period of time the thermal fuse will melt to stop the power to the fixing heater c Heater ON Detection Circuit 200V model only The period of time during which the fixing heater drive signal HTRD remains OFF is moni tored if an error is detected the power is turned OFF E004 will be registered CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND 6 Correcting the Displacement of the Fixing Film a Outline As rotation continues the fixing film tends to become displaced to the front or the rear To correct such displacement the machine has a fixing film displacement correction mechanism The correction is by the fixing film sensor PS2 for detecting the position of the fixing film mot
278. motor drive singal Pulse singal Not used Add Staple LED ON OFF 0 ON Stapler LED ON OFF 0 ON Not used Paper on tray indicator 1 ON PCB internal signal Not used PCB internal signal Bin feeding motor clock 2 Pulse input Not used Tray feeding motor clock 6 Pulse input Lead cam HP sensor 1 1 Lead cam horizontal PCB internal signal Bin unit delivery sensor P3 0 paper detected Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Stapler cover open closed detection SPLON Open MS5 Joint sensor MS3 TOP Released Stapler safety sensor MS6 SPLSFT Safety switch ON Stapler position sensor 4 SPLPD At HP Tray position detection 112 TRP At HP Guide bar HP sensor GBHP At HP Stapler HP sensor MS4 SPUHP At HP Stapling HP sensor MS7 SPLHP At HP Q N O 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 O G N 3 194 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING a Multi Output Tray 1 2 Input Output Ports 2 2 Address i Indication ST EX G Not used PCB internal signal PCB internal signal Tray B paper detection 111 Paper present Tray A paper detection P110 Paper present Tray B discharge paper detection Paper detected 9 Tray A delivery detection PI8 Pape
279. mperature temperature sensor signal amp ound the drum J117 5V When the toner inside TEP the developing assembly is below a specific level 0 Toner sensor 1 1 4108 Fixing main temperature AAA 4108 Fixing sub 3 temperature TH2 Upper cassette J114 5V delivery detection Pick up unit PCB 5V 9 UCSPD When 01604 has detected Q1604 _______ paper I Lower cassette delivery detection J114 Upper cassette paper 11 LCSPD When Q1605 has detected Q1605 level detection 0 3 55 paper 1 Lower cassette paper di 1RPDO When Q1606 has detected level detection 0 Q1606 J122 the lifter 1 Upper cassette paper 3 2RPDO When 01608 has detected Q1608 level detection 1 ER J122 the lifter 1 Lower cassette paper 2 iRPDi When 01607 has detected level detection 1 4 122 the lifter 17 4 2RPD1 When 01609 has detected the lifter 1 Figure 3 110 3 12 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Outputs from the DC Controller PCB 1 3 DC controller PCB J114 4 p 3 Main motor LL s See p 3 23 Scanner motor Laser scanner See p 3 60 lt motor driver PCB Laser scanner motor 1 11 Fixing Film JJ i Seep 3 123 p J76 J103 8 24V24V JEN 9 J C 546 Set back motor gt
280. n Logic DF ADO DF AD1 DF AD2 DF AD3 DF AD4 DF AD5 DF DAO DF DA1 Original sensor S1 In hexadecimal notation Registration sensor S3 In hexadecimal notation Original width volume VR1 In hexadecimal notation Not used Not used Not used Original tray sensor LED1 ON signal Registration sensor LED3 ON signal b ADF Input Output Port 3 192 Indication Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7 Input Output Port 1 of the Sorter 2 VO DISPLAY 07 ST A DXXXXXXXX ST B DXXXXXXXX ST C DXXXXXXXX COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 193 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING a Multi Output Tray 1 2 Input Output Ports 1 2 Address 00 Indication Logic ST A Guide bar motor drive signal 1 Pulse signal Guide bar motor drive signal 2 Pulse signal Guide bar motor drive signal 2 Pulse signal Guide bar motor drive signal 4 Pulse signal Guide bar motor drive signal ON 1 motor ON signal Stapler motor drive signal 1 1 motor CW Stapler motor drive signal 2 1 motor CCW Stapler swing motor drive signal 1 motor ON Sorter feeding motor drive signal Pulse signal Tray feeding
281. n original as perceived by the human eye does not show linear charac teristics in relation to the light reflected by the original The relationship between the density as per ceived by the naked eye and the output of the CCD are as shown in Figure 3 336 CCD output 255 0 Black White Density od original Figure 3 336 To correct the discrepancy the correction curve shown in Figure 3 337 is used to execute level conversion Output level 255 0 H 0 255 Input level Figure 3 337 3 48 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC b Density Processing The correction curve for density processing varies according to the following 1 Setting of the Copy Density key on the control panel 2 Results of AE measurement 3 Selection of text photo photo mode 4 Results of photosensitive drum resistance According to the setting of the Copy Density key the curve will be for darker or lighter as in Figure 3 338 When text photo or photo mode is selected the curve shown in Figure 3 339 will be selected to ensure good gradation and faithful reproduction of the density of an original Copy density Darker Lighter Text mode gt Density of original Figure 3 338 Copy density Text mode Text photo and photo mode L Density of original Figure 3 339 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www s 3 OPERATIO
282. nals by the Feeder The feeder option RDF G1 ADR F1 detects the original width original length and communi cates the result to the image processor a RDF G1 The RDF G1 identifies the size of an original in reference to the width detected by the side guide plate and the length detected in feeding direction As such the size is identified when the original is picked up the sizes that can be detected are any of the following default sizes A configured A4 A4R B configured B5 B5R B4 Inch configured STMT LTR LTRR FOOLSCAP LGL 11 17 b ADF F1 The ADF F1 identifies the size of an original in reference to the width detected by the side guide plate and the length detected by the three sen sors located on the ADF As such the size of an original is detected when it is placed in the feed er the sizes that can be detected are any of the following default sizes A configured A5R A5 4 A4R B configured B6 B6R B5 BSR B4 Inch configured STMT LTR LTRR FOOLSCAP LGL 117 17 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Ill IMAGE PROCESSING A Outline The image processing system converts the optical image projected on the CCD into electrical signals image signals for correction and processing The correction processing functions are by the following PCBs and the results of correction process ing are forwarded to
283. nd also as a lamp unit and a high voltage transformer unit Figure 3 801 is a block diagram of the entire composite power supply PCB and Figure 3 801 gives an outline of the DC power supply Composite Power Supply Output Output voltage Output voltage 24VR 24V 596 24VU 24V 10 7V 8 75 26 15V 15V 5 12 12 5 54V 5 1 3 5V 5V Table 3 801 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Power Supply with the Control Panel Power Supply OFF SLEEP The state in which the control panel power switch if OFF is called SLEEP state and it may be either power saving mode SLEEP 2 or quick start mode SLEEP 1 as selected by the power saving switch a Power Saving Mode SLEEP 2 In power saving mode power is supplied only to the CPU on the composite power supply PCB Power to the system power supply circuit need ed when the Printer Board or the like is installed will not be cut In power saving mode FAX reception is enabled When a communication arrives the signal is generated within the NCU The CI signal is sent to the CPU on the composite power sup ply PCB through the FAX Motherboard thereby turning ON the composite power supply PCB to start supply power to each PCB In power saving mode however printer func tions are not enabled For this reason software is programmed so that
284. ne t lt 6 gt 792 X a a lt U237N 6 4 170 Qd982 attr N dal 4 5 4d 2 ox twetas 3 Ne St tr stir 972015 2 hrs d 3018 getos v 2 03 Y730IS grin roso 0278 waos F ArC 19015 DC Controller C 10 yo2u 1 416 lt 018 lt 27 010 02 00 ya ertr et s 4 _ S3H 5380 eter ota age 2082 err 4 enr enr x 101 enr id evr NY J 120 TASH enr AUS te 620 erzu err Modri 909 ba CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 18 DC Controller Circuit Diagram 13 13 w APPENDIX ONS 1ndN 390 OId Y eryr AS sdi NISY 7 s GxiSv s axusy y 16 1sISSv Oxusv 5070 axisv 2300K4 730084 19v 3 19 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX E ANALOG PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Analog Processor Circuit Diagram 1 4 45v 5v 1007 1040 41001
285. ner home position sensor PS1 _ ws Scanning lamp FL1 Figure 3 203 3 22 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww msws ss sswYT 3 OPERATIONS AND D Scanner Motor 1 Outline The scanner motor M2 is a stepping motor and the motor is controller by the DC controller PCB The CPU on the DC controller PCB sends to the motor controller PCB through the I O circuit such com mands as clockwise rotation moving the scanner forward counterclockwise rotation moving the scanner in reverse and rotation speed The motor controller circuit operates according to the instructions of the CPU and sends pulse signals to the power control circuit The power control circuit in turn supplies power to the scanner motor M2 according to such pulse signals thereby rotating the scanner motor M2 DC controller 24N Motor controller y TL y Lay BLU Figure 3 204 Outline of Power Supply to M2 Figure 3 205 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 23 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING E Controlling the Scanning Lamp 1 Outline The scanning lamp is a fluorescent lamp and is controlled by the composite power supply PCB Figure 3 206 for the following Controlling the scanning lamp pre heating Turning ON OFF the scanning lamp
286. ng film sensor ss FFD sad 4113 5V B10 Copyboard cover 89 ose open closed sensor PS3 B8 J33 J113 5V A12 Multifeeder paper MFPD sensor 21111 00 40 J113 5V A6 Pre registration LL paper sensor J46 J109 5y 7 Fixing assembly po J 6 PDP3 delivery sensor ol J113 5V A3 Vertical path PDP4 paper sensor 4113 5v A9 A8 open closed RDOP detection J113 5V B7 Waste toner l 7 B6 sensor PS10 B5 Figure 3 108 3 10 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC When the scanner is at home position 1 The light blocking plate is at PS1 When PS2 has detected the fixing film 1 The light blocking plate is at PS2 When the copyboard or the feeder is closed 1 The light blocking plate is at PS3 When 54 has detected paper 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS4 When PS5 has detected paper 1 The light blocking plate is at PS5 When PS7 has detected paper 1 The light blocking plate is at PS7 When PS8 has detected paper 1 The light blocking plate is at PS8 When the right door is open 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS9 When the waste toner case is full 0 The light blocking plate is not at PS10 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON nputs to the DC Controller PCB 2 3 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
287. ngs 7 Figure 4 713 front of shaft end Figure 4 711 4 36 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON VIII ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A DC Controller PCB 1 1 2 3 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Removing the DC Controller PCB Disconnect the power plug Remove the four screws and remove the rear cover Remove the two screws 1 and disconnect all connectors then remove the DC controller 0 Figure 4 801 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM Composite Power Supply PCB Removing the Composite Power Supply PCB Remove the DC controller PCB Remove the two screws and remove the con nector mount 1 Remove the two screws 3 and disconnect all connectors then remove the composite power supply PCB Figure 4 802 4 37 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 2 Removing the LCD PCB and the C Replacing the ROM DIMM CPU PCB image processor PCB 1 Disconnect the connector D and remove the a 2 then remove the control panel 1 Removing the ROM DIMM pp 1 Turn OFF The main power switch 2 Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet 3 Remove the copyboard glass lens cover and IP cover 4 While opening the claw of the slot lift the ROM DI
288. nsfer roller Positive component Negative component 2 DC bias Figure 2 111 Positive charges are applied to the back of the Figure 2 110 copy paper by the transfer roller to transfer the toner image from the drum surface to copy paper During copying toner is attracted to the light The GP215 GP200 uses a roller transfer areas of the photosensitive drum by the work of method which requires less transfer voltage than the negative component of the developing bias a corona transfer method and generates virtually thereby turning the latent image into a visible no ozone image The excess toner is removed from the To prevent transfer faults or soiling of the back photosensitive drum by the positive component of of copy paper the transfer guide is given a nega the developing bias and the drum surface poten tive bias tial r Reference If the transfer guide was grounded the charges for use on the back of copy paper would escape leading to transfer faults If separated completely the transfer guide would be charged soiling the transfer guide and ultimately soiling the back of copy paper COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 5 2 COPYING PROCESS Kww srC_Css a Reference If the image on the photosensitive drum was not fully transferred to the copy paper because of a jam toner can stick to the transfer
289. nsfer Guide Fixing Roller Bias 3 69 G Developing Assembly Drum Cleaner 3 70 H Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 3 73 Detecing Errors on the Composite Power Supply PCB 3 74 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 3 76 A i aime dei meten dienen ete 3 76 B Pick Up from the Cassette 3 79 C Non Pick Up Operation standby 3 91 D Detecting the Level of Copy Paper 3 93 VII VIII E Detecting the Size of Copy Paper 3 95 Multifeeder 3 100 G Controlling the Registration Roller Clutch 3 103 H Making Overlay Copies 3 104 Making Two Sided Copies 3 106 J Lower Feeding Assembly 3 108 Fixing Delivery Assembly 3 118 L Delivery Assembly 3 127 M Detecting Jams 3 130 PANS 3 139 A Functions and Operaitons 3 139 POWER SUPPLY 3 141 A 3 141 B SLEEP 3 145 SYSTEM uu netter hee 3 148 A Basic Operation 3 148 B Diagram of the Function Boards 3 150 C Flow of Image Signals 3 154 SERVICE 3 158 3 158 B Using Service Mode 3 159
290. ntroller A1 As necessary use a relay cable 5 42 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Figure 5 522 15 If the entire length of the cable is inside the Copy Data Controller A1 end the work Attach the petty pull 8 on the right bottom of the copier s rear 8 227 Ed J O O Figure 5 523 16 Fix the cable connected to the Copy Data Controller A1 to the petty pull 17 Check to make sure that the cable is not trapped by the casters of the copier or the sorter CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 6 1 SCHECULED SERVICING CHART 6 2 Il CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES 6 1 IV SCHEDULED SERVICING 6 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING I PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS The machine does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis Il CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the period of warranty because of deterioration or wear Replace them as necessary Parts Parts No life copies Remarks Lower fixing separation claw FB1 7275 000 100 000 Separation static eliminator FF5 4467 000 100 000 Fixing assembly FG5 6261 000 200
291. nversion are returned to the ABC circuit for the following processing e Identifies the A D conversion circuit output signal level Varies the reference voltage based on the results of identification The reference voltage obtained here is sent to the A D conversion circuit The priority on speed function may be adjusted in service mode 3 see p 3 204 3 32 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING C Digital Image Processing 1 Outline The digital image processing block serves to process image signals from various functions boards See Figure 3 304 for a block diagram of various image processing functions Total processing Anal ion rali Negative Bo m Shading Edge emphasis positive reversal PCB correction Mirror image Smoothing Framing Repeat Blanking Folding Area signal Image processor PCB generation Binary processing Density Laser driver hesi Synthesis processing PCB D A conversion OCRE IP Board Figure 3 304 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 33 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KGw m IO _ cwa 2 Shading Correction The output of the CCD will not be constant for the following factors even when the light reflected by an original with even density is projected to the CCD 1 The sensitivity of eac
292. o 180 and 5 195 to 180 Normally one of 2 through 4 is sleeted Control 1 1st to 4th copy gt 235 5th to 6th copy gt 230 7th to 20th copy gt 225 21st to 30th copy gt 215 C 31st to 40th copy gt 210 41st to 50th copy 200 51st to 100th copy gt 190 C Control 2 1st to 4th gt 225 5th to 6th copy gt 220 7th to 20th copy 2159 316110 40th copy 210 416110 50th copy 190 51st to 100th copy gt 180 Control 3 1st to 20th copy gt 215 21st to 30th copy 2109 31st to 40th copy 200 41st to 50th 190 C 51st to 100th copy gt 180 Control panel power switch ON Start key ON Copy Start key ON STBY Continuous copying STBY Continuous copying Fixing heater H4 Main motor M1 18100 4th copy 5th to 6th copy I 1stto 5th copy 7th to 20th copy 6th to 10th copy 21st to 30th copy qistto 15th copy 31st to 40th copy 285 C o 280 C 35 225 C 1 euer mns 100 C bee Figure 3 640 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 119 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG Control 2 c If the temperatur
293. o o 0 2 5 O D iL Q605 CPU 22 S J209 A4 A9 c E E S J102 A4 A7 DC controller PCB 101 CPU Figure 3 508 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 69 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING G Developing Assembly Drum Cleaner 1 Outline The developing assembly is locked manually by operating the locking lever for each developing rail The developing cylinder stirring rod in the developing assembly and the feeding blade inside the drum cleaner are rotated by the drive of the main motor The level of toner is detected in reference to the toner absent signal TEP from the toner level sensor TS1 inside the developing assembly The waste toner collected by the cleaning bale is collected inside the cleaner case and the waste toner sensor PS10 turns on when the waste toner case becomes full 2 Detecting the Level of Toner A toner sensor TS1 of an oscillator type is provided inside the developing assembly to monitor the level of toner When the toner inside the developing assembly is more than a specific level the output of the toner sensor goes 1 When the toner falls below a specific level on the other hand the output of the toner sen sor goes 0 The CPU on the DC controller PCB reads the output of the toner sensor while the developing clutch CL4 remains ON It then computes the period during which the tone
294. o the fixing assembly thereby setting the fixing temperature control value Label Value to enter in this case 3 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Enter a value higher than the recorded value by 1 to 2 if shiny lines vertical occur on solid black copies CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Item Description Settings Remarks ABC TBL Use it to decrease the setting if the text den sity is too low light image when executing AE mode with priority on speed 0700009 Service handbook p 2 20 STRD ADJ Use it to adjust the scanner stop position in ADF F1 stream reading mode Make adjustments if the copy image is too light in stream reading mode using the ADF F1 AE LIGHT Use it to decrease the setting if the back ground of the original is too conspicuous when using AE mode with priority on image quality mode Service handbook p 2 21 AE DARK COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Use it to increase the setting if the text den sity is too low light image when executing AE mode with priority on image quality Service handbook p 2 21 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 205 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7 Shading Back Up Data 3 ADJUST 07 PPR lt W PLT xxxxx lt XXxxx L P5
295. o the flag blocking the pick up roller sensor S5 This error is identified when S5 does not turn on and off twice or more within 1 sec Belt motor M3 fails to rotate Belt motor clock sensor 510 faulty The number of belt clock pulses for 200 ms is below a specific value Feeder motor M2 fails to rotate Feeder motor clock sensor S9 faulty The number of feeding motor clock pulses for 200 ms is below a specific value Original tray paper sensor S1 faulty Registration sensor S3 faulty C Self Diagnosis of the ADF F1 Main cause The sensor output is 2 3 V or more in the absence of paper Description Data communication with the copier faulty Communication with the copier has been disrupted for 5 sec or more during stand by Communication with the copier has been disrupted for 0 5 sec or more during oper ation r Caution 1 Turn off the copier s power switch once if the self diagnosis mechanism has turned on 2 You may continue to make copies even when the RDF is out of order open the RDF and place originals on the copyboard glass 3 266 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING D Self Diagnosis of the Pedestal Main cause Description The pedestal has an error The communication IC Q101 on the Pedestal controller PCB faulty pedes
296. ode 0 J102 B7 transfer output mode 1 J102 B6 primary charging roller J102 B5 ON OFF static eliminator ON OFF J102 B4 laser scanner motor reference J112 8 clock developing AC drive J102 B3 scanner motor reference clock PCB internal signal scanner motor CW CCW rota tion PCB internal signal composite power supply PCB J102 A6 communication signal zero cross J102 A8 developing DC drive J102 B2 Not used Not used composite power supply PCB J102 A7 communication signal Not used upper cassette paper detection J122 1 upper cassette paper detection J122 2 1 lower cassette paper detection J122 3 0 lower cassette paper detection J122 4 1 Not used Not used COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 185 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Gate Array Input Output of the DC Controller PCB 2 VO DISPLAY 04 ICSW2 ICSWA ICSW5 ICSW15 ICSW25 21 10 3 186 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 Input Output Port 1 of the Feeder Guide to the Screen Ports for RDF Indicated when an RDF is connected COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 VO DI 4 DFP5 DFP6 DFP7 DFP8 DFP9 DFPA DF
297. oiling f Counter operation Clean the optical assembly Use a blower brush Scanning lamp reflecting if the dirt cannot be plate removed use alco Lens hol No 1 No 2 No 3 mirror Dry wipe the stan Dust proofing glass dard white plate Standard white plate Clean the transfer guide Remove the drum Transfer guide unit for work upper lower plate Transfer charging assem bly guide rail Clean the separation feeding assembly Separation static elimina tor Feeding belt Clean the fixing delivery assembly Fixing assembly inlet guide Lower separation claw Provide scheduled servicing p 6 4 according to the number of copies made 6 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Work Checks Remarks Clean the copyboard glass Make test copies Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure Make sample copies Put the sample copies in order and clean up the area around the machine Record the final counter reading Fill out the service book and report to the person in charge COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 MAY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 6 3 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING IV SCHEDULED SERVICING Caution Do not use solvents or oils not indicated A Clean
298. oing copying operation temporarily Or you can suspend fax reception or printer operation to make copies Fax reception or print er operation will resume as soon as you end inter rupt mode 1 Press the Interrupt key to select interrupt mode Available Operations Making one sided copies Making 1 to 100 copies Selecting non sort mode Selecting manual feed mode Selecting a density darker lighter AE Selecting a reproduction ratio may be auto Selecting a cassette De selecting ID mode De selecting interrupt mode You cannot use the document feeder for inter rupt mode 2 Place the original and press the Start key 3 To end interrupt mode press the Interrupt mode once again CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 17 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION wr u 4 Making Two Sided Copies or Overlay Copies Using manual feeding mode you can make two sided copies overlay copies Be sure to keep the following in mind when making two sided or overlay copying mode Make sure that the side copied and the side to be copied have the same orientation i e do not reverse rear and front when turning over the copy paper Make sure that the copy paper is not moist Make sure that the copy is not curled After the first copying run cool the copy paper sufficiently and remove the curling before starting the second copying run Use 64
299. oller A1 flashes Make a copy and check to make sure that LED3 flashes during copying operation LED2 LED3 LED1 VED2 15 5 Swe e SW3 69 69 LED4 LEDS LED6 z z 9 E 2 1 ui JC8 JB2 2 JC5 06 JB1 cpu 09 J5 IPC 6 1 6 1 SW4 moe mnn swi ON sws Figure 5 511 To connect the Communication Board A1 or the Interface Board B1 requiring the Power Supply A1 go to step 5 Turn ON the copier s main switch and check to make sure that LED1 turns ON and LED2 flashes Make a copy and check to make sure that LED3 flashes during copying operation LED1 LED2 LED3 LND1 LEg2 LED 5 2 Sw2 9 SW3 LED4 LED5 LED6 E g JA1 ui JC8 JB2 ES 405 406 JB1 299 J5 IPC 6 1 6 1 SW4 SW1 ON sws ON CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Figure 5 512 5 37 5 INSTALLATION 5 If group control is not to be used go to step 11 If group control is to be used set the input method control type and paper size to suit the needs of the user Set bit 3 of the DIP switch S
300. om Top and LEVEL as it rotates FILM_COMEBACK fixing film displacement recovery mode Use it if E007 is indicted when the fixing film has become dis placed for some reason In this mode the film is returned to its proper posi tion The operation ends when the film has returned to the proper position or after a specific period of time has passed The rough adjustment range is not reached in 30 sec or the fine adjustment range is not reached in 60 sec ON TIME Indicates the period during which the fixing film sen sor has been ON ONE CYCLE Indicates the time taken by the fixing film to make a complete rotation FILM SPEED Indicates the measured film speed LOCATION from TOP Indicates the position of the rear end of the fixing film from the V cut LEVEL COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Indicates the position of the fixing film 4 or 5 is opti mum CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 223 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 15 Measuring the Drum Resistance 4 FUNCTION 15 gt SELECT GAMMA JUMP AGS MEASURE uA 44 Description Reference page Photosensitive drum resistance 1 Brig up the screen and press the Copy Start key measurement The resistance of the photosensitive drum will be measured and the result will be indicated Execute this mode b
301. on detection To reset remove the originals from the original tray and then open the RDF COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 169 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING GO Overstacking Alarm Multitray 12 Nature Cause Operation Display Resetting Overstack ing of paper The paper being stacked during multitray operation has exceeded the capacity of a sin gle bin Partial Fault Alarm Multitray 12 Cause Stops upon detection over stacking Operation Indicates a mes sage on the copier s control panel Display Remove all paper from the bin Resetting 3 170 An error occurred in the bin unit feeding motor M2 bin shift motor M1 guide bar swing motor M4 or stapler swing motor M5 the same type of error has occurred after turning off and on the power COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Prohibits delivery to the sorter however permits delivery to the tray No indication Remove the cause of the error and turn off and then on the power CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Stapler Alarm Multitray 12 Cause Operation Display Resetting The stapler safety sensor MS6 has turned on for some reason The stapler is not securely installed Normal stapling op
302. on start position of the horizontal sensor Figure 3 635 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 115 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG Figure 3 636 and Table 3 612 show the electrical parts associated with rear front registration detection DC controller PCB co QO Q 2 c QIS 5 og gt N O 0 lt N lt 79 _ gt gt a E 5 M SL4 9 Y wm EN Y 511 514 Re pick up roller CL5 _ Set back rollers Figure 3 636 Electrical parts Main motor Set back roller motor Horizontal registration motor Vertical path clutch Lower feeding assembly re pick up clutch Re pick up paper deflecting solenoid Vertical path sensor Re pick up sensor Horizontal registration sensor Table 3 612 3 116 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON eee 3 OPERATIONS AND c Adjusting Horizontal Registration service mode Adjust the horizontal registration in RSID SNSHP 4th screen of ADJUST in service mode 3 if a discrepancy occurs in rear front direction during pick up for copying on the second side of an overlay two sided copy In this adjustment the po
303. ontrol Card V Film Projector 1 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www ssRYR 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4 Others Opera Temperature 7 5 to 32 5 C ting envi ronment Humidity 5 to 85 Atmospheric pressure 0 8 to 1 0 atm 120 V Serial number GP200 NFY xxxx GP200F NFZ xxxx 220 240V GP215 UBY xxxx QFY xxxx SFY xxxx TFY xxxx UFY xxxx GP215F UBZ xxxx QFZ xxxx SFZ xxxx TFZ xxxx UFZ xxxx Power Maximum 1 5 kW or less con sumption Standby 0 080 kWh reference only Continuous copying 0 750 kWh reference only Quick start mode SLEEP 1 0 045 kWh reference only Power saving mode SLEEP 2 0 003 kWh reference only Copying 66 dB or less sound power level Standby 40 dB or less sound power level 0 01 ppm or less average 0 02 ppm or less max 585 mm pedestal copyboard cover 700 mm pedestal ADF 571 mm pedestal RDF Body only w copyboard cover w ADV w RDF Consuma bles COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Copy paper Toner Keep copy paper wrapped to protect against humidity CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 5 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION wr 5 Copying Speed Reproduction ratio Size Copy paper size Copies min Direct A3 297 x
304. or paper rection 20 sheets pack Consult the following for a stocking idea A Each service person is expected to carry one B Each group of five service persons is expected to carry one C Each workshop is expected carry one COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 37 APPENDIX L SOLVENTS OILS Name Use Composition Description Ethl alchol Ethanol Isopropyl alchol Isopropanol Cleaning copyboard glass mirror etc C2 Hs OH CHZ3 e Do not bring near fire Procure locally Isopropyl alcohol may be sub stituted MEK Cleaning e g metal oil or toner dirt C2H5 Methylethyl ketone Do not bring near fire Procure locally Heat resistant grease Lubricating fixing drive assem blies Lithium soap mineral oil family Molybdenum bisulfate Tool No CK 0427 500g can Equivglent grease can be used but should be able to withstand 200 C for extended periods of time Lubricating oil low viscosity Lubricating Scanner rail etc Mineral oil paraffin family ISO VG 68 Oil CK 0451 100cc MOBIL Vactraoil NO 2 Lubrication oil low viscosity Lubricating pick up assembly roller bushing FS2 1005 000 Mineral oil paraffin family ISO VG 220 Oil CK 0524 100cc Lubrication oil A 38 Lubricating
305. or M5 for correcting the position of the film Caution The lower roller is released when the front door is open If the power is turned on in this condition the fixing film can become displaced or the fixing heater can become damaged Be sure to keep the roller locked when working with the front door open DC controller PC Main motor drive signal MMD Fixing film detection signal FFD Main motor driver PCB Tension roller G Fixing film motor drive signal FMD Fixing film Fixing film sensor PS2 Delivery Drive roller Fixing h r g heate Lower roller Figure 3 642 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 123 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING The fixing film sensor PS2 is located at the edge of the film to detect the position of the fixing film The rear sensor side of the fixing film has a notch as shown in Figure 3 643 so that the fixing film sensor repeats turning ON and OFF Normally the sensor remains ON and OFF for the same period of time when the fixing film is centered When the fixing film starts to move to the rear the sensor will tend to remain ON longer than OFF if the film starts to move to the front the sensor will tend to remain OFF longer than OFF See Figure 3 644 The DC controller checks the ratio between ON and OFF periods of the sensor to correct the position of the fixing
306. or less in standby about 1 4 of exist ing Canon models The roller charging method has enabled ozone less operation The width is only 58 5 cm With the MDC function built into the machine more space is saved additional copier fax printer and network functions may be built into the machine with out affecting the machine size 4 GP215 Series with duplexing functions As many as four models are available with combinations of copier copier fax and copi er printer The copier fax model comes standard with an ADF F1 or an RDF G1 Printer Duplexing Copyboard GP215 A GP215F ADF GP215FA ADF F1 GP215F GP215FR RF G1 Standard O Option Either copyboard cover ADF F1 or RDF G1 as an option PostScript Level 2 Sleep state is when the main power is OFF Fax reception is possible Not 4 W if a fax transmission reservation has been made or the printer function has been added Standby state is when the main power is on In copier fax mode 57 W or less In copier mode 50 W or less COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 1 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Il SPECIFICATIONS 1 Type Specifications Body Desktop Copyboard Fixed Light source Fluorescent lamp Lens Lens array Photosensitive medium 2 System OPC Specifications Copying Indirect
307. ot found 1 Remove the four screws and remove the rear cover 2 Open the front cover 3 Slide out the cassette 4 Remove the screw 1 from the vertical path cover D Front door 2 Right cover Figure 4 201 1 _ j 1811 1 Iw Figure 4 203 9 pm wht HN ulii P AU D Rear cover 4 Delivery assembly cover 2 Upper rear cover 5 Delivery tray 8 Left cover 6 Delivery assembly lower cover Figure 4 202 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 3 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5 While pulling the center of the lower right cover 2 release the hook and remove the lower right cover Figure 4 204 6 Open the multifeeder tray 7 Remove the four screws 3 and remove the right cover 4 Figure 4 205 4 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC B Inside Cover 1 Remove the screw D and open the front door then shift and pull off the two pins 2 from the hinge to remove the front door Figure 4 206 2 Remove the screw 4 and remove the fixing cover 3
308. ower switch is ON Sh Power saving mode switch l Figure 3 105 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 7 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING nputs to and Outputs from the Image Processor PCB 2 3 Image processor PCB SE ilu 2 Original size 0571 sensor 1 3 ES Original size 5872 sensor 2 3 See 3 26 J507 1 5V Original size 2 DSZ3 sensor 3 3 J508 5 V 1 Original size 0574 sensor 4 29 FAX Motherboard Board da Checks are not meant for the field G3 FAX Board Figure 3 106 3 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING nputs to and Outputs from the Image Processor PCB 3 3 Image processor PCB Switching PCB switch Control panel LCD J905 J517 intensity VR Control panel CPU PCB C Checks are not meant for the field One touch dial cover open closed detection Touch panel EIE 516 1 5V LCD back light power supply 2 BKLTON When 0 the back light turns Figure 3 107 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 9 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG e nputs to the DC Controller PCB 1 3 DC controller PCB J107 5 S h ye canner home position sensor d J46 vii 5V Fixi
309. paper sensor CRGPD Tester probe J114 B2 Service mode Make checks nor mal if as indicated DC PCO bit6 Open the right door and insert copy paper into the re pick up paper path during standby then inside the copy paper toward the rear Before sliding the copy paper toward the rear When the copy paper is slid toward the rear Display reading 1 0 Tester reading 3 256 about 5 V COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC about 0 V CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 9 Isolating the PCBs printer image fault he printer image is Is the Network Interface Board NIB installed YES Is the FAX Board installed Make a copy using the copier only Execute NIB test printing YES 5 the copy image normal Print out the test print font list for the Printer Board Test print font list at 300 400 and 600 dip Disable the REFINE function and print out test print font list Execute FAX test printing trial shot VIDEO TEST NO Is the test print image normal Turn the main power switch OFF ON while paying attention to LED1 leftmost Check the following of the NIB Execute test printing in service mode Is the test print image normal NIB interface settings jumper connector
310. r PS19 35 Stationary Residual Sensor Duplexing unit Re pick up sen inlet sensor sor PS11 Low PS12 order Type order code 62 63 of jam code Delay 01 0162 0163 Stationary 02 0262 0263 Residual 10 1062 1063 Door Front door Right door Pedestal right door Low order Type Narder 50006 01 02 03 of jam coda Door open 11 1101 1102 1103 3 164 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ws 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Multitray 12 Feeder Related Jam Codes Unit Jam code Description Multitray 12 0003 Sorter feeding delay jam 0004 Sorter feeding stationary jam 0006 Sorter staple jam 0007 Sorter power on jam 0008 Sorter door open jam paper present 0009 Sorter door open jam paper absent 0001 Original pulled out 0002 Registration delay jam 0003 Pick up delay 0005 Registration delay 0011 Reversal delay 1 0012 Reversal stationary 0013 Reversal delay 2 0020 Reversal paper present 0021 Reversal pick up delay 0023 Reversal pick up stationary 0041 Delivery delay 0042 Delivery stationary 0081 Opened with RDF in operation 0082 Upper cover opened during operation 0083 Original circulation fault 0084 Original left behind 0088 Original left behind on copyboard glass 0089 Re circulating lever fault COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996
311. r detected Tray feeding assembly inlet slot Paper detected sensor COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 195 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 8 Input Output Port 2 of the Sorter 2 DISPLAY 08 ST ADO xxH ST AD1 xxH ST AD2 xxH ST AD3 xxH ST AD4 ST AD5 xxH ST AD6 xxH ST AD7 xxH WMO b Multi Output Tray 1 2 Input Output Ports Address Indication Logic ST ADO 24V monitor ST AD1 Bin paper sensor PT1 Analog input ST AD2 Not used ST AD3 For factory R amp D ST AD4 Staple key 0 Key ON ST AD5 Push SW SW2 0 SW2 pressed ST AD6 Push SW SW1 0 SW1 pressed ST AD7 Staple absent 1 Staple absent 3 196 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING F 3 ADJUST adjustment mode Use this mode fine adjust set back up data needed for copying operations Each press on the key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen Press the item you want to adjust or set notation to highlight Use the keypad to enter numbers e Press the key to accept the selected setting Record all new settings on the service label When done turn off and then on the main power switch 1 Fine Adjusting and Entering the Multifeed
312. r images in relation to main scan ning direction Addres nnn 1234567 2 1 K d OS 2 H 5 1 pixel 1 byte Writing Reading Figure 3 321 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC f Image Repeat Original Main scanning direction abc Sub scanning direction Address S Address E lt gt Figure 3 322 B Principle When reading data for a single scan from RAM a start address address S and an end address address E are specified for reading Then reading is started at address S when address E is reached a return is made to address S A specific image is repeated by repeating these operations Adress 1234567 Image signal 1 pixel 1 byte lt Reading Figure 3 323 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 43 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING g Repeat h Slant Main scanning direction Main scanning Q direction 4 lt 5 8 e gt Address S 5 Address E Copy lt gt 4 a abc abc Figur
313. r sensor output remained ON to issue a message to initiate toner supply See Table 3 502 and Figure 3 510 for how this is done Result Operation Resetting Toner absent level 1 is Toner supply is initiated but Resetting occurs when toner assumed if the sum of the peri copying operation is prohibited has been stirred by keeping the ods in which toner is absent is FAX reception and printer out developing clutch ON for 6 sec 20 sec or more in the past two put are possible after the control panel power checks switch was tuned ON or the front door was opened and closed Toner absent level 2 is Toner supply is initiated but Resetting occurs when toner assumed if the sum of the peri copying operation FAX output has been stirred after keeping ods in which toner is absent is and printer operation are all the developing clutch ON for 30 160 sec or more prohibited sec and detecting the presence of toner after the control panel power switch was turned ON or the front door was opened and closed Table 3 502 3 70 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Computation of Toner Level Detection Result cleared Result cleared Toner present Toner absent TEP occurs Figure 3 510a Since toner is stirred by the stirring rod inside the developing assembly the toner absent and present states repeat at intervals as s
314. ration using SW3 on the ADF controller PCB A higher setting will increase the non image width LA SPEED COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Use it to adjust the origi A higher setting increases the feeding speed nal feeding speed contracting the image in feeding direction A lower setting decreases the feeding speed extending the image in feeding direction CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 241 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING K Electrical System 1 When Replacing major Parts Item Service mode Steps Before replacing the image processor PCB 4 PRM PRNT effective only if equipped with fax function 1 Print out all registration data one touch dialing speed dialing user data list etc effective only if equipped with fax functions 2 If the machine is equipped with fax functions execute PRM 4 and take notes of the settings in user mode and others Executing the mode will print out the settings values under ADJUST 3 OPTOIN 6 and COUNTER 6 If the machine is not equipped with fax functions you cannot execute PRM PRNT 4 After replacing the image processor PCB 3 242 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 RAM Clear 9 Enter the value record ed on the label Service label attached to the front door Label attached to the image processor PCB Label attached to the
315. re 3 1024 3 Insert the handle of the separation static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assem bly releasing assembly and insert the door 7 switch actuator into the door switch assembly 4 Turn on the main power switch Then press the service switch and press the key twice 5 Press FUNCTION 4 on the screen to lt highlight then press the OK key SES 9 Figure 3 1023 3 Install the removed covers and connect the power cord into the power outlet then turn on the main power switch 3 250 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 Press the Page key to bring up the Downloading screen 4 FUNCTION 13 IP DOWN LOAD PRCON DOWN LOAD JUMP dd JUDD Figure 3 1025 7 Press IP DOWNLOAD on the screen to high light then press the OK key press on the OK key will automatically shut down and boot the power When the machine boots up it will show the following screen to indicate that it is in downloading mode COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 251 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7 AE Adjustment The machine s AE auto density adjustment mode may be either priority on speed mode or priority on image quality mode Each of these modes may be adjusted in service mode and
316. re rises abnormally Thermistor TH1 TH2 short cir cuit DC controller PCB faulty The main thermistor TH1 detects more than 250 C for 200 ms during copying operation The sub thermistor TH2 detects more than 260 C for 200 ms during copying operation The main thermistor TH1 detects a tem perature in excess of a specific tempera ture by 30 or more for 200 ms during copying operation The thermistor TH1 TH2 detects an increase in temperature of 40 or more during standby The main thermistor TH1 detects an increase in temperature of 100 C or more in 1 sec The main thermistor TH1 detects in increase in temperature of 100 C or more in 1 sec COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC The fixing temperature fails to reach a specific value Thermistor TH1 TH2 off con tact poor contact open circuit Fixing heater open circuit cracking Fixing heater drive circuit faulty CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON The main thermistor detected less than 105 for 200 ms 1 sec after it has detect ed 90 C The main thermistor TH1 detected less than 120 for 200 ms 1 sec after it has detected 105 The main thermistor detected less than 120 C for 200 ms after it has detected 105 C The main thermistor TH1 detects less than 135 C for 200 ms 1 sec after it has detected 120 The main thermistor TH1 detects less than 150 C for 2
317. riginal Original size The original sensor 1 turns OFF for such originals as may be the last original A4 B6R B5 STMTR LTR but the detected original is not the last original Note The number in parentheses under the Code column is in decimal notation COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 167 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING ALARM RDF Re circulating bar S1 Original tray paper sensor 57 Pick up sensor S3 Registration paper sensor S13 Re circulation sensor Type Sensor Conditions RF operation Re circulating lever idle 13 The re circulating lever swung idly Stops immediately swing without coming into contact with an upon detection original immediately after the re cir culating motor M4 has started to operate Pick up fault The sensor S7 does not detect the The separation belt leading edge of an original 1500 ms feeding roller and after pick up pick up roller stop immediately The RDF stops after delivering the copy of the advance orig inal 3 168 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Type Sensor Conditions RF operation Paper stopper plate override S7 The original has ridden over the paper stopper plate when the origi nal was set Stops immediately upon
318. rnal signal ON ON N NO O1 original leading edge signal PCB internal signal original indicator LED drive LED4 Not used Not used PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal communication signal 1 ON 3 190 OIT OONN COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 DIP SW 3 DIP SW 4 DIP SW 5 DIP SW 6 push switch 2 push switch 1 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING b Input Output Port of the ADF 2 2 Address 5 Indication DFPB PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal PCB internal signal OI 9 OO N O original width detection 2 original width detection 1 original width detection 3 original width detection 4 original length detection 1 PI9 original length detection 1 18 original length detection 1 PCB internal signal 0 1 2 3 4 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 191 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 Input Output Port 2 of the Feeder 2 O DISPLAY 06 DF ADO xx DF AD1 xx DF AD2 DF AD3 DF ADA DF AD5 DF DAO xx DF DA1 a RF Input Output Ports Address Indicatio
319. roller is driven by the cassette pick up motor M4 and is lowered to reach copy paper at time of pick up The pick up roller is lowered by the movement of a cam operated by the drive of the main motor M1 switched by the pick up roller down solenoid SL2 The feeding roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of copy paper is fed the copy paper is moved to the feeding assembly and then to the registration roller by the vertical path roller 1 2 The drive of the vertical path roller and the pre registration roller is from the main motor M1 switched by turning ON and OFF the vertical path roller clutch CL3 The drive of the registration roller is from the main motor M1 coming by way of the registration roller clutch CL1 Figure 3 603 shows the arrangement of the electrical parts and the concept of the drive mechanism and Table 3 603 shows the sensors and sensor signals Notation DC controller M1 Main motor J114 B6 M4 Cassette pick up motor J114 Registration roller clutch J114 B11 Vertical path roller clutch J114 A4 Pick up roller down solenoid J114 A5 Note Pulse signal so that it cannot be checked by a meter in reference to its state 0 1 Table 3 603 List of Loads in the Cassette Pick Up Assembly COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 79 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING DC controller
320. rolls 3 from the left and the right T Te 2 1 EE Figure 4 408 3 Remove the multifeeder assembly Reference When installing the multifeeder connector cover match the top first and push the bot tom in 4 20 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 2 Removing the Multifeeder Pick Up Roller 1 Pull out the multifeeder rolls 2 Detach the cable from the cable and remove the right door Figure 4 409 3 Remove the snap on bushing 2 and shift the roller shaft 3 in the direction of the arrow 4 Remove the stop ring 2 and remove the mul tifeeder pick up roller 5 r Caution Work carefully while paying attention to the pin at the rear of the pick up roller IK NS Figure 4 410 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www sUAmss lt c lt smwcc s 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 3 Removing the Separation Pad C Feeding Assembly 1 Remove the right door 2 Remove the multifeeder pick up roller 1 Removing the Feeding Assembly 3 While pushing the end 1 of the right door in the direction of A remove the rear of the
321. rror has occurred in communi The communication has been interrupted cation with the pedestal An error has occurred in communi The communication has been interrupted cation with the Copy Data Controller An error has occurred in the out The output voltage 24Vu or 24VR of the put voltage of the composite composite power supply PCB has an error power supply PCB Both ends of the fluorescent lamp has blackened because of deterio ration 3 264 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ee 3 OPERATIONS AND Action to Take in Response to Error Codes When the self diagnosis function has turned ON and an error code has been indicated you can reset the machine by turning its power switch OFF once E000 E001 E002 E003 E004 and 007 01 and E717 is not reset by turning OFF the power switch this is to prevent the user from casually resetting the machine since such could sometimes damage the machine Resetting 1 Start service mode by pressing the service switch and then pressing the key twice 2 Press FUCNTION on the LCD to highlight then press the OK key 3 Press ERROR on the LCD to highlight then press the OK key This will automatically remove and then supply power Inthe case of E202 the keys on the control panel will be locked without indicating an error code use ERR under
322. s CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 34 APPENDIX Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 7 8 41 qO VAS 193S Trap 9 5 9 8 yd lt 4 5958 bezo 045 E 2049 35 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC APPENDIX KGwwsrstit i s uwII a Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram 8 8 04 SEVE 8 sour O 50 004 o 000 0 TS 0048 T5 004 004 0 S ud 12 9ASY 3578 35v8 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC A 36 K LIST OF SPECIAL TOOLS The following are special tools used to service to copier use them in addition the standard set of tools Tool Name Tool No Remarks Digital FY9 2002 000 Use it to check the Multimeter power Door switch TKN 0093 actuator Mirror positioning FY9 3009 040 For adjusting the tool front rear distance between No 1 and No 2 mir ror mounts NA 3 Test sheet FY9 9196 000 use it to adjust check images Standard White FY9 3004 000 For shading c
323. s are normal 1 Press the FAX key to select the FAX Standard screen 2 Press the Extension Mode key 3 Press the Test Shot key place an original and press the OK key Try communications tests to check the operation and the images COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 23 5 INSTALLATION l Checking the Copy Images Work Remarks If in service mode press the If the front door is open remove the door switch actuator Reset key twice to end it and the separation static eliminator brush then close the front door If the copier is not on a pedestal install the lower right cover as shown then slide out the upper and lower cassettes and fit and tighten a screw Using the NA 3 the Chart make Optimum Images copies to check the images Text The white background is free of fog ging Text Photo Step edge No 10 is barely visible the white background if free of fogging Photo The white background is free of fog ging Moire near the step edge of halftone bands may be ignored Clean the area around the machine and fill out the service sheet 5 24 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 INSTALLATION Caution Perform the following adjustments Shading Adjustment and Automatic Density Adjustment only if t
324. s of a control card No DEPT ID MANAGE MENT STORE DEPT ID PASSWORD COPY TOTALS Use it to specify whether the function should be controlled by group You may store confirm up to 100 groups group ID and ID numbers ID control by group No ID number regis tration No INITIALIZE COMMON CUSTOM SETTINGS COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Allows you to return the custom settings to their defaults CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 2 Timer Setting Item Description 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Factory settings DATE TIME Use it to set the current date and time You may use con tinuous 4 digit numbers AUTO SLEEP TIME Use it to set the time between key operation and start of sleep state by automatically turning off the control panel power switch 5 10 20 30 min 1 to 8 hr use service mode 5 SHUT OFF to turn ON OFF auto sleep time setting 5 min AUTO CLEAR TIME Use it to set the time between key operation and start of the Basic screen automatically 0 No auto clear 1 9 Set in 1 min increments TIME UNTIL UNIT QUIETS DOWN Use it to set the time between copying oper ation and start of quiet mode 0 9 Set in 1 min increments DAILY TIMER SET TINGS COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Use it to set the time at which the control panel power switch is automatically turned off at a specific t
325. say Vertical path roller Q1604 Q1605 ees Figure 3 601 Pick Up Feeding Assembly Sensors COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 77 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Name Registration roller clutch Multifeeder roller clutch Vertical path roller clutch Lower feeding assembly re pick up clutch Re pick up flapper solenoid Paper deflecting plate 1 solenoid Main motor Set back roller drive motor Lower feeding assembly inlet roller drive motor Delivery roller drive motor Table 3 602 Pick up Feeding System Motors Clutches and Solenoids DC controller PCB le uf X 5 10 e 1 1 1 1 aO 1 2183 or Br 7 O gt Main motor driver PCB A S 1 Q 1 1 515 105 5 J105 3 ram wmm a J103 Figure 3 602 Pick Up Feeding System Motors Clutches and Solenoids 3 78 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ws 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING B Pick Up from the Cassette 1 Pick Up Operation The copy paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter so that it is in contact with the pick up roller during pick up The pick up
326. scanner motor rotates in response to the instructions from the DC controller PCB and its sup ply power is controlled by the scanner driver PCB The laser scanner motor M3 rotates when the laser scanner motor drive signal LMD 1 is sent by the DC controller PCB to the scanner driver PCB At this time the hall IC output signal returns from M3 for controlling the supply power used to rotate M3 The power supply timing is controlled so as to respect the phase of the rotation reference pulses FS from the DC controller PCB thereby ensuring a specific rotation speed 6 facet mirror DC controller PCB Laser scanner motor drive PCB 24VU gt scanner FS motor Motor drive M3 LMD circuit p Hall IC LOCK output lt lt Figure 3 405 3 56 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Turning ON and OFF the Laser Scanner Motor The laser scanner motor M3 starts to rotate differently depending on whether time to quiet mode in user mode is set to 1 9 or 0 If the time is set to 1 9 rotation starts when the following is performed during standby D Pressing a key 2 Opening the copyboard cover or the feeder 3 Placing an original in the feeder If the time is set to 0 rotation starts when the Copy Start key is pressed The laser scanner motor turns OFF as set in
327. sensor PS8 O 5 Cassette pick up motor M4 Ts Main motor M1 Figure 3 656 Sequence for Pick Up Delay Jams COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 131 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KGwss sSwkw lt Cm b Multiple Pick Up Pre Registration Sensor Delay Jam A delay jam will be detected if copy paper does not reach the pre registration sensor PS5 within a specific period of time after the multiple pick up clutch CL2 has turned ON Copy Start key ON Pick up of 2nd Jam message Multiple pick up clutch CL2 V INTR Pre registration sensor jam check Pre registration sensor PS5 Main motor M1 Normal Error Figure 3 657 3 132 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ww ssri 3 OPERATIONS AND c Pre Registration Sensor Delay Jam A delay jams will be identified if copy paper does not reach the pre registration paper sensor PS5 within a specific period of time after the vertical path roller clutch CL3 has turned ON Copy Start key ON Pick up of 2nd Jam message V V V INTR 3 Vertical path roller drive clutch CL3 1 Pre registration paper sensor jam check Pre registration paper sensor PS5 Main motor M1 Figure 3 658 Sequence for Pre Registration Roller Paper Sensor Jams
328. sheet Figure 5 407 12 Turn OFF the copier power switch and check the operation of the Control Card V 8 Place the plastic sheet 12 in the hole in the control panel used for the display of the Control Card V Figure 5 408 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 33 5 INSTALLATION V COPY DATA 2 Set the DIP switch SW1 SW5 on the Copy Data Controller A1 to suit the needs of the CONTROLLER A1 user 1 Remove the two screws 2 and remove the 2 1 Set the DIP switch SW1 4 to suit the copi upper cover 1 er type 2 2 To use the group control function set bit 2 of the DIP switch SW5 to suit the control paper size To use AB configured papers A4 B4 B5 set the bit to OFF To use Inch configured papers 11x17 LTR LGL STMT set the bit to ON Figure 5 501 Position Function Remarks OFF For normal operation ON For IPC communication CLC700 800 NP6750 NP6016 GP Series For serial communication NP6030 NP6060 NP8530 NP9800 For using a central control device Requires the Interface Board B1 For normal operation or for remote control Requires a commercially available using a commercially modem and the Interface Board available modem B1 for remote control via a modem For initializing the RAM For normal operation For factory adjustment For normal operation For control of Inch con
329. sic Screen of the Touch Panel 1 Copier Basic Screen Ready to copy 100 1 JL em q SORTER Sie E SPECIAL FEATURES Figure 1 403 2 Fax Basic screen Press the Fax key to open this screen Ready to send 00 00 STANDARD STD TEXT AUTO RX RESOL DIRECT CODED DIALING REDIAL SPECIAL FEATURES th FAX MONITOR Figure 1 404 Note For details see the Fax Service Manual COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 15 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION C Basic Operation 1 Functions Keys Of the keys on the screen you may select any of the following on the screen Ro nm 120V 78 73 64 50 25 95 230V 50 25 96 E 120V 121 129 200 400 800 96 230V 141 200 96 Zoom Ratio display Auto Zoom Entire Image XY Zoom Zoom Program Multi page Enlarge SORTER Sort Staple Sort Group only if sorting unit is installed PAPER Auto paper selection stack bypass cassette SELECT SPECIAL REC Transp INTERLVING SHIFT MAREGIN FRAME ERASE TWO PAGE FEATURES SEPARATION MODE MEMORY SHARPNESS IMAGE CREATION AREA DESIG IMAGE COMB IMAGE SEPARATION SHEET OVERLAY DI
330. sition of the horizontal registration sensor electrically stored in memory is shifted thereby moving the position of laser exposure This is not to physically move the position of the sensor f the image is displaced to the rear decrease the value Specific distance Image area Copy paper Edge Value decreased Virtual home position Figure 3 637 f the image is displaced to the front increase the value Image area Specific distance v V Copy paper Edge Value increased Virtual home position Figure 3 638 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 117 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING K Fixing Delivery Assembly 1 Outline The drive roller of the fixing assembly is driven by the main motor M1 When the drive roller rotates the fixing film rotates thereby rotating the lower fixing roller Part of the inner side of the fixing film is heated by the fixing heater The temperature of the fixing heater is checked by the thermistor TH1 and the result is sent to the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB as the fixing heater temperature detection signal TH1 Based on the TH1 signal the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB varies the fixing heater drive signal HTRD to control the temperature of the fixing heater The rear end of the fixing heater is also equipped with a thermistor TH2 to check for overheating of th
331. ss A Scanner Drive Assembly onal panel Rear cover upper rear cover right cover 1 Removing the Scanner Drive left cover Motor 2 Remove the metal fixings D front rear of 1 Remove the four screws and remove the rear the scanner cable cover 2 Remove the three screws and remove the fly wheel 3 Remove the four screws 2 and the spring 3 then remove the scanner drive motor Figure 4 302 3 Remove the two screws 3 and release the cable spring stay 2 front rear Figure 4 301 Figure 4 303 4 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM 4 Loosen the set screw 2 and remove the cable front rear Figure 4 304 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 9 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM KF 3 Routing the Scanner Cable Note You need the following tools when routing the scanner cable 1 Mirror positioning tool FY9 3009 040 2 Pulley click FY9 3010 000 Work in the order indicated in Figure 4 305 Put the steel ball into the pulley hole Q and wind the cable 3 5 times toward the inside and 6 times toward the outside both front and rear 2 Fixthe cable in pl
332. tal controller PCB has gone out of Connector poor contact order 24V power supply faulty Pedestal motor M20 faulty The rotation speed fails to reach a specific Pedestal controller PCB faulty value within 10 sec after the pedestal motor has turned on The rotation speed has deviated from a specific value for 3 sec or more while the motor is rotating E Self Diagnosis of the Multi Output Tray C1 Main cause Description The shift tray home position sen The home position detection signal does sor fails not turn on within 5 sec during shift tray home position search COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 267 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING F Self Diagnosis of the Multi Output Tray 12 Main cause Description The CPU Q7 on the tray con troller PCB or the communication IC Q11 is not operating normally An error has occurred in the communication between the multi tray and the copier The bin unit feeding motor M2 fails to rotate The bin unit feeding motor clock sensor 2 has fault The bin unit feeding motor clock sensor 2 does not receive clock signals 4 0 sec or more after the bin unit feeding motor drive signal BFMD has been generated The tray feeding motor M6 fails to rotate The tray feeding motor clock sensor 6 has fault The tray feeding motor clock s
333. tance of the photosensitive drum The result is converted into a density correction curve to exert control for stable generation of good qual ity images and this mode of control is called automatic density correction curve selection AGC The timing at which measurements are taken is as follows During initial rotation after a press on the Copy Start key During initial rotation after opening closing the front door except for jam removal pur poses During initial rotation after turning on the power switch on the control panel During post rotation after generating 500 copies printouts CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING C Controlling the Transfer Charging Roller Bias 1 Outline The GP215 GP200 uses direct transfer exe cuted by means of a roller As many as four types of biases are used for application to the transfer charging roller and each has the following func tion and output timing Photosensitive drum Composite power supply PCB Transformer 24VU 24VU ees T502 T101 Transformer Transforemer output a increase circuit 24VU detection p Y 4 9v Constant current 1 3 4 control 24VR 2 T101_ b 17 s 58 drive Overcurrent 2 2 circuit detection
334. ted to the 6 facet mirror rotating at a specific speed The laser beam reflected by the 6 facet mirror is moved through the imaging lens and its optical path is bent by the laser mirror before it reaches the photosensitive drum While all this is taking place the laser beam is bent to an acute angle by the BD mirror located inside the laser scanner unit for the BD detection PCB Figure 3 401B When the 6 facet mirror rotates at a specific speed the laser beam scans the surface of the photo sensitive drum at a specific speed to remove charges and as a result to form a latent image Original exposure system Laser exposure system VEO Scanning lamp AE x No 1mirror Lens CCD d nou 1 Analog s No 3 mirror 21 processor 2122 2222 s PCB 4 Image processing system processor Baord E PCB x Printer FAX Laser Laser beam 1 Board Driver Laser E Laser mirror Figure 3 401A COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 51 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KGw swswS sssrsitrscirw lt a a Image processor PCB gt DC controller PCB
335. tem is ready to accept downloading IP FDIMM download program 3 Operate according to the instructions on the PC Screen 3 222 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 14 Adjusting the Fixing Film 4 FUNCTION 14 gt T ROLLER FIX OK START FILM INIT ROTATE OK START FILM COMEBACK OK START PUN ON TIME xxxx msec ONE CYCLE xxxx msec FILM SPEED2xxxx LOCATION from mm 10 LEVEL 1 234 5 k k k x x 6 7 8 T ROLLER FIX fixing tension roller fixing mode Use it to mechanically adjust the pressure of the fixing film drive roller Execute it as part of adjust ment performed after replac ing the film Description In this mode the fixing film is rotated idly with the fixing tension roller being held in place after return ing the film to an appropriate position same as in FILMCOMEBACK While the fixing film is rotated idly the speed of displacement to the rear front of the film is measured and the result is indicated under FILM SPEED on the control panel Reference page FILM_INIT_ROTATE fixing film initial rotation mode Use it after replacement of the fixing film or the fixing assembly In this mode the fixing film will automatically stop at a specific position indicating the position under LOCATION fr
336. the PCBs that follow them Analog processor Image processor PCB Laser driver PCB PCB 0 D A conversion A D Shading Image conversion correction processing driver circuit circuit circuit circuit Binary processing CORE IP Binary Reproduction Board processing ratio for fax processing Video signal switching circuit G3 FAX Board NCU Printer Board Command conversion circuit Network Protocol controller PCB Board Figure 3 301 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 29 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gas PCB Correction processing Destination Analog processor PCB A D conversion ABC auto background control To the image processor PCB Image processor PCB Shading correction Reproduction ratio processing Filter processing Negative positive reversal Framing blanking Density processing Binary processing for copy images D A conversion To the laser driver PCB and the PCB CORE IP Binary processing for fax images Reproduction ratio processing for fax images and printer default transmission To the Fax Board through the FAX Motherboard also to the electronic sorter FAX Board Coding decoding Rotation To the telephone l
337. the Screen 4 FUNCTION 12 CANCEL R amp D SHADING START OK START Press to execute Now Status indication WB xxxxH WP xxxxH LAMP xxxxH GDA1 xxH GDA2 xxH CDA3 xxH CDA4 xxH ADDA5 xxH D ODD xxH D EVN xxH X Results of measurement for each item COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 221 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 13 Downloading Mode updating FLASH ROM 4 FUNCTION 13 IP DOWN LOAD PRCON DOWN LOAD JUMP Ct Item Description Reference page FLASH ROM updating mode 1 Perform the following in advance D Turn off the main power switch IP DOWNLOAD 2 Open the front door and remove the connec for updating FALSH ROM on tor cover for servicing then connect the copi image processor PCB er to a PC with an RS232C cable Insert the handle of the static eliminator clean PRCON DOWNLOAD ing brush into the fixing assembly releasing for updating FLASH ROM on assembly then turn on the main power protocol controller switch 4 Press the service switch and press the key twice select FUCNTION 4 so that the Downloading screen will appear 2 Press DOWNLOAD or DOWNLOAD to highlight then press the OK key The power will automatically be removed and then will be supplied The following screen will appear to indicate that the sys
338. the concepts used for the modes are as follows 1 Priority on Speed Mode Use TBL under ADJUST in service mode 3 A lower value for will make the text darker between 1 and 9 A higher value for ABC_TBL will make the text lighter between 1 and 9 factory default 3 The adjustment will modify the density correction curve Copy density Higher setting Lower setting lt Black Original density Black White Figure 3 1026 3 252 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON eee 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Priority on Image Quality Mode a AE SLOP For priority on image quality mode an AE table is selected based on a study of the original density his togram prepared during a pre scan The slice level distinguishing the data into text black and background white can be adjusted under AE SLOP in service mode ADJUT 3 AE SLOP A higher setting makes the images darker between 1 and 19 left of Figure 3 1027 b AE LIGHT AE DARK The AE table selected as a result of a pre scan may be corrected to suit the preference of the user AE LIGHT A higher setting emphasizes the background of the original a lower setting on the other hand de emphasize the background of the original between 0 and 40 with the default at 20 upper right of Figure 3 1027 AE DARK Ahigher setting will increase
339. the pre deter mined target value and shading data and sets the difference as the shading correction value The shading correction value is used to correct variations among CCD pixels occurring at time of scanning and to ensure a specific image density level CCD output Characteristics after correction Target value Measurement data T Characterisitics before correction Standard white plate Figure 3 306 CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Original density Gw 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Vertical Reproduction Ratio sub scanning direction 2 Total Processing The total processing block deals with the fol lowing The speed at which the scanner is moved is Reproduction ratio varied so as to change the width of scanning Shift an original Mirror image Table 3 302 gives an idea of how the Slanting GP215 GP200 processes reproduction ratios Repeat 8 Zoom Fine Adjustment Folding You can adjust the vertical or the horizontal reproduction ratio using zoom adjustment in user mode in 0 196 increments For instance for adjustment width 1 both X and Y 5096 5196 10096 101 400 gt 401 Reproduction Ratio Horizontal Reproduction Ratio main scan ning direction When writing image data into memory data units may be skipped for reduction when reading them from memory they are read a multiple number of times enlargement
340. the selec tion of an AE table 2mm lt 2mm Figure 3 343 Points of AE Measurement Copy density 1 Density of orignal AE Table for Background Type Figure 3 340 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Density of orignal AE Table for Reversal Type Figure 3 341 gt gt Density of orignal AE Table for Other Type Figure 3 342 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 49 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7T Binary Processing 8 D A Conversion The binary processing circuit converts multi The D A conversion circuit is used to convert ple value image signals into binary signals The multiple value image signals into analog signals method used here is called the PD method which D A conversion is executed in photo mode enables better reproduction of highlight areas than the median density MD retention method Binary processing is executed in text mode and text photo mode 3 50 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING IV LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM A Laser Processing Assembly 1 Outline The major components of the laser unit include a laser unit which serves as the source of laser beams a laser scanner motor which is equipped with a 6 facet mirror and a BD detection PCB which serves to detect laser beams The laser beam generated by the laser unit is direc
341. there is a fax memory image In such a case print out the mem ory image then turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the power plug 3 Some units remain powered after the control panel power switch is turned OFF be sure to turn OFF the main power switch 4 Keep in mind that the machine will remain powered even when the front door is opened as long as the control panel power switch and the main power supply switch are ON OPTION D Control panel power switch 3 Main power lamp Main power switch 4 MEMORY TX RX lamp USA Figure 4 101 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 1 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM B Handling the Harnesses Exercise care when using the harness retainer square bush to avoid biting the harnesses NO GOOD Figure 4 102 4 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM Il EXTERNALS Note Remove the covers as necessary when cleaning inspecting or repairing the inside A External Covers of the 1 Those covers that can be detached by sim ply removing their mounting screws and that can be removed on their own are omitted from the discussions 1 Removing the Right Cover Skip steps 4 and 5 if the lower right cover is n
342. this mode in combination with PD density auto correction and 600PWM density auto correction 4 FUNCTION 05 gt 200PWM PRINT START WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY SAMPLING OK DATA SET A xxx B xxx XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX MULTI 0 gt CASSETTE1 A4 CASSETTE2 A4 bb nes Item Description Reference page 200PWM density auto correc 1 Press 200PWM PRIT to highlight and press the Service tion Copy Start key handbook A 15 gradation test pattern will be generated p 2 21 2 Place a black sheet of paper whitest of all used by the user no color copy paper allowed on the copyboard glass press WHITE MEASURE to highlight and press the OK key The scanner makes a single scan 3 Replace the paper with the test pattern generated previously press DENSITY MEAUSRE to high light and press the OK key Printed side down 4 Check the value of A B and D Insert 5 If the values are as indicated press DATA SET to highlight and press the OK key 3 212 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 6 600PWM Density Auto Correction This mode must be executed in combination with PD density auto correction and 200PWM density auto correction 4 FUNCTION 06 gt 600PWM PRINT START WHITE MEASURE OK DENSITY SAMPLING OK DA
343. tifeeder 1 8 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Model with ADF F1 as Standard SS Figure 1 302 6 Main power switch 2 Cassette Feeding Unit L1 option Front door 9 ADF F1 Original delivery tray for ADF CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION y d 1 AM Delivery door Control panel Copyboard glass Developing assembly releas ing lever Developing assembly Feeding assembly releasing lever Drum unit Fixing assembly releasing 8 lever opening Door switch assembly Power saving mode switch SLEEP 1 top Quick start mode Anti condensation func tion ON SLEEP 2 bottom Power saving mode Anti condensation func tion OFF Cassette heater option switch Service switch Counter total Counter printer LCD display contrast adjust ment OONO O Figure 1 303 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 1 9 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B Cross Section 1 Cross Section of the GP215 5 s
344. time to quiet mode If the time is set to 0 the rotation stops at the end of LSTR Main power Control panel Start Switch ON power switch key ON SLEEP STBY INTR SCFW LSTR STBY 2 fe O Main motor M1 2 Laser scanner motor M3 Figure 3 406 With the setting of time to quiet mode in user mode set to a value other than 0 a key on the control panel is pressed an original is placed in the feeder or the copyboard cover is opened B May be varied in user mode quiet mode if 0 is set the period B will be removed COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 57 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING V IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM A High Voltage Transformer Circuit The high voltage circuit associated with the formation of images is built as part of the composite power supply PCB and is used for the following Controlling the primary charging Controlling transfer charging Controlling the current for the separation static eliminator to a specific level Controlling the developing bias DC component Turning ON and OFF the developing bias AD component Applying a transfer guide bias Turning ON and OFF the fixing bias In addition to the high voltage transformer circuit the composite power supply PCB is equipped with lamp regulator and power supply circuit f
345. tion of the lamp has been detect ed during copying COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC An error in the communication with the DC controller PCB has occurred DC controller PCB faulty Image processor PCB faulty CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON An error has been detected in the commu nication between the DC controller PCB an the image processing PCB 3 263 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gr Main cause Description An error has occurred in communi An error has been detected in the communi cation with the control panel cation between the CPU on the control panel Control panel CPU error and the image processor PCB Image processor PCB faulty There an error in the zero cross The intervals of zero cross signals are out signal side the allowed range Power supply frequency fluctu ation Composite power supply PCB faulty The intensity of the scanning lamp is not correctly adjusted Intensity sensor faulty Scanning lamp faulty DC controller PCB faulty An error in IPC communication BS does not go 1 for 3 sec has occurred An error in IPC communication DT has been written in the error register has occurred four times An error in communication with the The communication has been interrupted feeder has occurred An IC error has occurred sorter The communication has been interrupted An e
346. tline of Power Supply in SLEEP 2 power saving mode Printer Network Board I F Board Composite power supply PCB Lamp regulator Main power Front door switch switch k 2 System Motherboard DC power supply DC power supply circuit 4 DC 15V Laser driver PCB 15V power supply E DC 5V DC 7V FAX Image processor DC 12V Motherbord PCB 47 12V power supply 47 5V power supply 5V power supply Analog processor PCB DC 15V lt o DC 12V FAX Board Laser scanner motor driver PCB DC 24Vu Control panel Control panel power switch ON signal E Main motor driver PCB DC 24VR Multi Output Tray B2 RF Control panel power supply switch DC controller PCB DC 24Vu DC 24VR DC 15V DC 12V DC 5V DC loads ADF Multi Output Tray C1 Pedestal Sensor Clutch Solenoid Power is not supplied to shaded units Figure 3 803 3 144 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING B SLEEP Mode SLEEP 1 to Standby When the control panel power switch is 1 Outline turned ON or The machine has the following four states During off hook depending on the mode of power supply
347. to end service mode 15 Turn off and on the main power switch A4 esee esas VR output A6R A6R A4R A4 105mm 210 297mm Paper width Figure 3 1015 3 247 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 5 Shading Auto Correction 2 3 3 248 There are two types of shading correction for servicing and for R amp D factory Use the 3rd screen in 4 do not use shading auto correction for R amp D factory n shading correction various data items are measured and the results are stored in RAM on the image processor PCB The data will be used as target values for shad ing correction executed before copying Execute the mode R amp D factory for the fol lowing After replacing the standard white plate After replacing the scanning lamp After replacing the DC controller PCB Open the front door and insert the handle of the separation static cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing opening Separation static eliminator cleaning brush Figure 3 1016 Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly Press the service switch with a hex key will be indicated in the upper left corner of the LCD COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC 4 Press the key twice The Service Mode Menu screen will appear SERVICE MODE gt 1 DISPLAY 2 DISPLAY 8 ADJUST 4 FUNCTION 5 OPTION 6 COUN
348. trols copying operations Controls fax operations Control panel message Controls fonts e g fonts used for fax headers Stores service mode user mode various parameters Controls communication with the DC controller PCB Table 3 101a 3 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Gw 3 OPERATIONS AND b DC Controller PCB Description Controls pick up feeding operations Controls the pedestal Controls high voltage sequence Controls the laser scanner motor Detects jams Controls service mode Controls the IPC Controls the sorter Controls fixing Controls the main motor Controls the scanner motor Detects the cassette paper Detects original size Contains control programs Controls sorter RDF ADF combinations Table 3 101b c Composite Power Supply PCB Description Controls the control system power supply Controls high voltage Monitors power switch inputs anti condensation switch Monitors the Cl calling indicator fax call signal Controls the power supplies of loads Controls the scanning lamp Table 3 101c COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 3 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 2 Block Diagram of the CPU DC loads Clutch Solenoid Motor Sensor Sorter RDF ADF Communication control device 3 4
349. tte should recognize an envelope cassette Default 1 AGS NON Use it to specify whether 0 change the density correction curve based the density correction on the results of measuring the resistance curve should be modified of the photosensitive drum based on the results of do not change the density correction curve measuring the resistance Guide of the photosensitive If the results of making adjustments drum according to the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure are not good execute the 15th screen 4 If the indicated value is far off the target value set the item in this mode to 1 so nor mal images may be obtained However if such a problem occurs you must suspect a fault in the image processor PCB DC controller PCB or composite power supply PCB COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 229 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Gw Item Function Description SPCL PPR Use it to change thick paper mode 0 The thick paper mode remains off Switching the fixing temperature the thick paper mode is supported The fixing temperature is switched so that paper thicker than that supported under 1 may be supported However for 1 and 2 the icon for the special cassette must be registered using ADDITIONAL FUNCTION i e the third icon from the middle row SCAN SEL Use it if parts of an image are missing
350. turns on and off Normal if the counter drive signal is 0 when the counter turns on The option counter fails to operate Option counter CNT3 open cir cuit DC controller PCB faulty A check is made immediately before the counter turns on and off Normal if the counter drive signal is 0 when the counter turns on The copy data controller counter is faulty Communication counter data between Copy Data Controller and copier DC controller PCB faulty The count data is not detected by the Copy Data Controller within a specific period of time after the copier has gener ated the copy start signal The horizontal registration home position detection mechanism fails Horizontal registration sensor PS14 faulty Horizontal registration motor 9 faulty DC controller PCB faulty COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC The home position is not detected after generation of the horizontal registration drive signal CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Main cause The high voltage primary charg ing transfer charging developing output is faulty Composite power supply PCB faulty DC controller PCB faulty Wiring faulty short circuit open circuit 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Description The difference between the high voltage control signal and the actual high voltage output is more than a specific val
351. ue Any of the primary charging roller transfer charging roller and developing bias has an output error A BD error has occurred Laser unit faulty BD PCB faulty Laser driver PCB faulty mage processor PCB faulty The BD signal is not generated within 2 sec after the laser has been turned on The BD signal cycle has a discrepancy The laser scanner motor fails to lock Laser scanner motor M3 faulty Laser scanner driver PCB faulty DC controller PCB faulty A specific speed is not reached after the laser scanner motor drive signal has been generated The speed deviates after it has reached a specific speed E190 The RAM has an error E191 An error has occurred in serial communication between the DC controller PCB and the composite power supply PCB The communication data is not updated for 8 sec or more The check sum of the communication data is different for three times in a row E202 No code indi cation Keys on con trol panel locked The scanner home position cannot be detected Scanner home position sensor PS1 faulty Scanner motor Faulty DC controller PCB faulty Scanning lamp error activation Scanning lamp faulty Composite power supply PCB faulty DC controller PCB faulty The scanner does not return to home position after it has started to move Activation of the lamp has been detected during standby Deactiva
352. uency of these clock pulses and the phase of the frequency of the ref erence signal are compared and controlled so that they match thereby controlling the current to the main motor and maintaining the revolution at a specific speed The condition in which the phase of the clock pulses generated by the motor and the phase of the reference pulses match is called locking in which the constant speed state signal MLCK 1 is sent to the DC controller PCB If a discrepancy occurs in the revolution for some reason MLCK will go 0 If MLCK remains 0 for about 3 sec a main motor error is detected causing all operations to stop E010 will be indicated on the control panel CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ee 3 OPERATIONS AND Composite power supply PCB Main motor driver PCB 24V 0 Drive current DC controller PCB Drive circuit MMD J114 B6 Encoder Hall IC output MLCK J114 B7 Output pulse Reference signal 10 Figure 3 114 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 17 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KGww ssu oIOEmm Main power ON Copy Start key ON Control panel power OFF
353. unctions The discussions here are limited to the high voltage transformer circuit For general descriptions of the composite power supply PCB as a whole see Power Supply Composite power supply PCB Primary charging roller HVT circuit Lower fixing roller eliminator Figure 3 501 3 58 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON Sequence of Operations high voltage related outputs OPERATIONS AND TIMING Main power Copy Start Control panel power supply ON key ON supply OFF INTR STBY INTR2 SCFW SCFW LSTR STBY SLEEP Main motor M1 Fixing heater H4 arm Vhn Scanner motor M2 I u Scanner home position sensor PS1 I Scanning lamp Vertical path roller paper sensor PS8 sss Registration clutch CL1 s Primary charging roller bias DC component Primary charging roller bias AC component SS Transfer charging roller r 1 Separation static eliminator Developing bias DC component Developing bias AC component mnl m 1 Transfer guide bias O 0 Fixing bias u COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC Figure 3 502 CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996
354. ure 3 24VU DFLD 24VU FMD1 15V 24vU 15V 24vU 15V 24VU 15V 24VU f 112 When 0 CL1 turns ON When 0 CL2 turns ON When 0 CL4 turns ON When 0 CL5 turns ON When 0 CL1 turns ON When 0 SL3 turns ON When 0 SL4 turns ON When 0 SL5 turns ON When 0 FM1 rotates The CPU control mechanism switches between high speed and low speed modes The CPU control mechanism switches between high speed and low speed modes The CPU control mechanism switches between high speed and low speed modes The CPU control mechanism switches between high speed and low speed modes CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING Outputs from the DC Controller PCB 3 3 DC controller PCB J107 24VR 11 IE cad lamp A12 Turns ON when 0 J107 24VU B3 Counter CNT 1 B4 CNT1D Counts when 0 J107 24VU B5 Counter CNT 2 B6 CNT2D Counts when 0 J107 24VU Counter 5 115 230 B6 only CND3D Counts when 0 Pick up assembly jal oe PCB A1 wieren 03 m roller clutch A4 CL3 turns ON when 0 Cassette J114 pick up 512 E solenoid SL2D SL2 turns ON when 0 01 12A While is rotating I alternates between 1 and 0 Cassette Motor AT 12B pick up motor EN ulse signal A8 p gnal 12 0 Always 1
355. value of the multifeeder in mm SW Refers to a specific cassette cassette size sensor output rear to Table 0 00 DET Indicates the paper size REMAIN Indicates the volume of paper inside the cassette full 500 sheets much little about 10 mm high little absent Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette 5 Cassette 6 3 176 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING List of Cassette Sizes Configur Cassette Cassette code ation AB Cassette absent 11111 AS 10010 A5R A4 A3 B5 B5R B4 U1 FLSC OFICIO A OFI E OFI B OFI A LGL U2 FOLIO 03 A FLS SPECAL1 SPECAL2 Envelope 1 Inch STMT STMTR LTR A LTR LTRR A LTRR LGL 11 17 04 G LTR U5 G LTRR U6 G LGL U7 K LGL U8 K LGLR SPECAL1 SPECAL2 Envelope 2 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 177 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING E 2 I O DISPLAY I O display mode Use this mode to indicate the input output states of the input output ports of the CPU You cannot change the indicated values settings Each press on the key brings up the next screen each press on the key on the other hand brings up the previous screen A press on the CANCEL key will bring up the Menu screen
356. ve drum If the surface of the photosensitive drum is soiled wipe it with a flannel cloth coated with toner Do not use paper lint free or otherwise Do not dry wipe or do not use solvent COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 29 5 INSTALLATION RELOCATING THE MACHINE Perform the following work when the machine must be relocated after installation by truck or other means of transportation 1 Points to Note If you have to move the copier placed on its pedestal from room to room do not lift the copier with your hands in the grips such will separate the copier from its pedestal Be sure to hold the pedestal when lift ing the machines 2 Before Relocating the Machine Work Checks Remarks Remove the drum unit Put the drum unit in a separate box for transport Fix the scanner in place Tape the charging assemblies and the feeding assembly releas ing lever in place to prevent dis placement by vibration Tape the front door and the deliv ery assembly in place Place a single sheet of A3 copy paper on the copyboard glass and tape the copyboard cover feeder in place 3 Lifting the Copier Off the Pedestal Work Checks Remarks Open the pedestal s right corner and release the guide shift to the right used to join the pedestal and the copier Hold the copier s grips and lift the copier upright so th
357. ve been measured 21 Press the Page key and execute 200PWM density auto adjustment Follow the same steps starting with step 9 to execute the mode 22 When 200PWM density auto adjustment is over execute 600PWM density auto adjustment Follow the same steps starting with step 9 to execute the mode 23 Press the Reset key twice to end service mode If the values under A B and D are not as indi cated after executing copy density auto correc tion several times and in addition optimum images cannot be obtained you may perform the following as a temporary remedy The temporary remedy will enable normal copy ing however since the image quality will lower be sure to correct any fault as soon as possible and execute copy density auto correction once again Possible Faults Drum unit Scanning lamp Laser unit Composite power supply PCB Analog processor PCB Image processor PCB CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON www srmis 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 4 Registering the Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Values You must register the multifeeder paper width basic values whenever you have replaced the multifeeder paper width detecting VR 1 Replace the paper width detecting VR 2 Open the front door and insert the handle of the separation static eliminator cleaning brush into the fixing assembly releasing assembly 3
358. within 1 sec after has turned off The IC Q7 on the tray controller An error has occurred in the communication PCB or the communication IC between the multi tray and the copier Q11 does not operate normally Operation in Response to an Error 1 The message display indicates TURN ON POWER 2 When the power has been turned off and then on the copier will reset the error if the results of self diagnosis it has run are good It will indicate an error code if any error is detected Copier Operation with an Error Code On 1 The copier indicates E5XX or E713 2 The copier allows making copies when the multitray is detached from it 3 The copier will indicate a message if modes requiring the use of the multi tray is selected Turn off the joint sensor MS3 feeding the multitray from the copier you need not disconnect the communication connector connecting to the copier COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 269 CHAPTER 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM This chapter discusses mechanical characteristics of the machine and explains how to disassemble and assemble the parts Keep the following in mind when disassembling or assembling the machine 1 Make sure that the power plug remains disconnected for safety when disassem bling or assembling the machine 2 Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
359. wn into the gap on the right of the cam stop arm thereby locking the fixing assembly Static eliminator brush Figure 3 648 Figure 3 649 3 126 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON NENNEN 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING L Delivery Assembly 1 Outline The machine allows the selection of either of two delivery modes in user mode service mode a Face Up Delivery In this mode copies are delivered with the copied sides up e g when delivering one sided copies or delivering two sided copies after copy ing on the second side Initially face up delivery mode is selected regardless of the selected copying mode DC controller J105 A2 513 3 650 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON b Face Down Delivery In this mode copies are delivered with the copied sides down e g when delivering one sided copies or delivering two sided copies after copying on the second side When copy paper has been moved through the fixing assembly the paper deflecting plate 1 operates to move it in the direction of the lower feeding assembly face down delivery unit A specific period of time after the leading edge of copy paper has moved past the lower feeding assembly inlet paper sensor PS12 the lower feeding assembly inlet
360. y Mother CIST Printer Board D A Density 1 D A Density f conversion correction board conversion correction lt conversion correction Video processing Video processing Video processing Y Note Printer settings determine whether printing will be subject to resolution 600 400 300 dpi and CIST processing COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU 3 259 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING XI SELF DIAGNOSIS The machine is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism that checks its condition sensors in par ticular and indicates a code on the control panel upon detection of an error A Copier Main cause The fixing temperature fails to rise Thermistor TH1 poor contact open circuit Heater driver faulty DC controller PCB Description The main thermistor TH1 detects less than 50 C for 200 ms 1 sec after voltage has been applied to the heater The main thermistor TH1 detects less than 90 C for 200 ms 2 sec after voltage has been applied to the heater The sub thermistor TH2 detects less than 90 C for 200 ms 4 sec after voltage has been applied to the heater The fixing temperatu
361. y will not be executed regardless of the position of the switch Originals _ face down Reversal for face down delivery 3 149 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KG B Diagram of the Function Boards CORE IP FAX Board Board Image processor Network Interface PCB Board Protocol controller PCB Scanner Board J200 J201 System Motherboard Printer Board 3 150 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 1 Functions The CORE IP Board Protocol Controller PCB and Scanner Board provide the functions discussed on the pages that follow a CORE IP Board The CORE IP Board processes and distributes image signals The board distributes image signals from the Image Processor PCB to the FAX Board or the Image Server The board also serves to forward image signals from these boards to the image processor PCB The board processes image signals by an ED method error diffusion i e binary processing resolu tion conversion and reproduction ratio processing You may install an CIST Board equipped with the ability to convert printer images to 1200 x 600 dpi main scanning x sub scanning CORE IP Board Resolution Binary processing conversion CIST Image processor circuit ED reproduction PCB ratio processing Image process
362. ze sensor TKEY Touch Panel Press TKEY to highlight then press the OK key All messages turn OFF Then when the touch panel is pressed the area will become highlighted reverse video After the check press the Reset key to end service mode 3 174 COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON w 5 OPERATIONS AND TIMING KEK CHK code Key Keypad 0 Keypad 1 Keypad 2 Keypad 3 Keypad 4 Keypad 5 Keypad 6 Keypad 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Keypad 8 Keypad 9 Start Stop Clear Interrupt Guide User Mode COPYRIGHT 1996 CANON INC CANON GP215 200 REV 0 JULY 1996 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 3 175 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING 7 Copy Paper Size Indication Use this mode to indicate the size of copy paper set in the multifeeder or in the cassettes and the out put readings of the paper size sensors 1 DISPLAY 07 A D P SENS SIZE MULTI xxx x xxx xxmm SW P SENS DET REMAIN CST 1 XXXXX X XXXXX XX CST 2 XXXXX X XXXXX XX CST 3 XXXXX X XXXXX XX CST 4 XXXXX X XXXXX XX CST 5 XXXXX X XXXXX XX CST 6 XXXXX X XXXXX XX OK Descriptions Refers to the multifeeder Indicates the output analog of the multifeeder width sensor Indicates the presence absence of paper 0 paper absent 1 paper present Indicates the A D input

SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents